Skip to main content

Full text of "New and improved method for the guitar"

See other formats


iVEW  AND  IMPROVED 


FOB   TBI 


1.  OJ&H^JiSSI 


BOST 


Oliver   Ditson  Compa 


|H.  DITSON  &  CO 


VON  &  HEAl 


|fciir***<J  'ixordint,  tn  Hue  n*i<if  Ciiiffcef^  in  'fio  i'i/u 


PHiXADryiUA: 


JOSTO% : 

JO,"    'C.  HAYNES  4  CO. 


: 


TKtyt  TLibtavp 

of  tljc 

^Enibersitp  of  i^ortf)  Carolina 


The 
William  Cain  Collection 

Presented  by 

Archibald  Henderson 

Class  of  1898 

787.61 
C26n 


COLLECTIONS  FOR  THE  PI 

aining  some  of  the  Greatest  Works  of  the  Greatest  Masters. 


H. 

ipered  Clavichord.  —  A  superb 
rd;   substantial   binding    and   clear 

-eight   fugues   exists   in  this  form ; 

of  some  of  the  masterworks  of  the 
t  find  this  book  reliable  and  correct. 
Price,  cloth,  $4.50. 

)vest. 

Jully  revised  Stuttgart  edition;   also 

ilted  by  Sigmund  Lebert,  assisted  by 
:nm  Op.  5.1  to  111,  edited  by  Dr.  Hans 
3.  D.  Parker,  and  copyrighted  by  the 


i  been  attended  with  more  care  and 

upon  any  pianoforte  music  in  this 

wuni-ij.    u>cij>  p.cucuao  uceu  ciigiavcu'by  one  ot  the  best  music  engravers 

in  America  or  Europe.    Two  volumes,  oheet  music  size.    Prlc/jj  cloth,  each, 

$G.0O;  paper,  eaob,  $3.06. 

CHOPIN, 

Chopin's  Mazurkas  and  Waltzes.  —  Complete  collection.    Sheet  music  size. 

To  which  is  prefixed  his  biography  and  a  critical  review  of  his  works  by 
F.  Liszt.  This  work,  by  one  of  the  great  masters  of  music,  should  be 
owned  by  every  pianist.  Price,  c'oth,  §3.00. 

Chopin's  "Waltzes.  — Complete.    Peters'  edition  reprinted.    Sheet  music  size. 

An  elegant  engraved  edition  of  the  waltzes,  carefully  revised  with  foreign 
fingering,  by  Hermann  Scholtz. 

Price,  paper,  50  cents;  cloth,  $1.35. 
Chopin's  Waltzes.  —  Stereotype    edition.    Sheet  music  size.    Complete  and 

reliable.  Price,  paper,  50  cents. 

Chopin's  Waltzes.  —  Elegant  plate  edition  known  as  the  "  Russell  Edition." 

Price,  $3.00. 
Chopin's  Mazurkas.  —  Complete.    Paper  edition.    Price,  $1.00. 
Chopin's  Nocturnes.  ^-  Peters'  edition  reprinted,  No.  1004. 

Elegant  edition  of  these  classic  Nocturnes  revised  aiul  fingered  by  Her- 
mann Scholtz.  Price,  cloth,  $1.50;  paper,  GO  cents. 

CLEMENTI. 

dementi's  Sonatines.  —  (Op.  36,  37,  38.)    Peters*  edition,  Leipzig,  reprinted. 

Revised  by  Kiihler.    Sheet  music  size. 

Cleinontl's Sonatines  are  extensively  used  by  teachers;  they  are  as  admir- 
aole  for  study  as  for  recreation.  This  is  a  line  engraved  edition  ■*  *■  a  low 
price.  Price,  50  cents. 

HAYDN. 
Haydn's  Sonatas. — This  Is  a  substantial  edition  of  the  Sonatas  of  the  great 
master.    Every  advanced  player  should  have  it.     Price,  paper,  $2.00;  cloth, 
$3.00. 

KOHLER. 
Kohler'g  Kinder-Album,  two  books  each.  —  Charming  pieces  for  little 
players.  The  music  is  of  the  better  grade,  carefully  fingered  (foreign  finger- 
ing), and  printed  In  large  size  from  elegant  engraved  p.ates.  Price,  75  cents. 
Kohler's  Sonatinen  Album.  —  Peters'  edition  reprinted,  No.  1233,  bis. 
Contains  Sonatines  by  Kuhlau,  Clemcnti,  Haydn,  Mozart,  Beethoven,  and 
Pusaek,  and  rondos  and  other  pieces  by  Bach,  Haydn,  Mozart,  Beethoven, 
Schubert,  Wehe-,  and  Mendelssohn.  Foreign  fingering.  Excellent  for  young 
players.    Price,  cloth,  $1.50;  paper,  75  cents. 

KUHLAU. 

Kuhlau's    Sonatines. —Peters'  edition,  reprinted,  No.  715  A.    Edited   by 
Louis  Kohler.    Foreign  fingering.    Standard  Sonatines,  used  by  teachers 
generally.  Price,  cloth,  $1.25;  paper,  50  cents. 

MENDELSSOHN. 

Mendelssohn's  Songs    Without  Words     (Leiiler   Ohnc    Worte).—  Copy  of 

Peters'  edition,  reprinted. 

Thisisa  superb  edition  from  engraved  plates,  shoot  music  bIzc,  fingered  by 
Theo.  Kullak,  and  in  every  way  perfect  ami  reliable.    Ask  for  O.  Dltsou  & 
t;o.'s  fine  edition.    Price, cloth,  $1.50;  paper,  $l.oo. 
Mendelssohn's    Songs    Without    Words      {Licdcr    Ohnc    Worte).  —  Sheet 

music  size.    Price,  cloth,  $1.50;  gilt,  $2.00. 
Mendelssohn's  Songs  Without  Words     (fAcrier  Ohne  Worte).  —  Elegantly 

printed  from  engraved   plates.     American    lingering,    by   C.   II.   .larvis. 

Price,  cloth,  $4.00. 
Mendelssohn's   Songs  Without    Words      (Lieder    Ohne    Worte).  —  With 

European  fingering,  by  Hugo  Leonard.    (Known  as  "  Russell's  Elegant 

Engravod  Edition.")    Price,  cloth,  $4.00;  cloth,  full  gilt,  $5.00.    ' 

N.  B. —  All  the  editions  contain  tho  full  number  of  forty.nlno  songs,  and 
are  on  plates  of  full  sheet  music  size. 


MOZART. 

Mozart's  Nineteen  Sonatas.  —  Metronomized  and  fingered.     Price,  cloth, 

$4.00. 
Mozart's  Nineteen    Sonatas.  —  Fingered  by   J.  Moschclles.      Price,  cloth, 

$4.00;  cloth,  full  gilt,  $5.00. 

N.  B.  —  These  editions  are  elegantly  bound,  printed  from  engraved 
plates,  full  sheet  music  size,  known  as  the  "  Russell  Engraved  Edition." 

SCHUMANN. 

Schumann's  Album  for  Young  Pianists.  —  Containing  fifty-six  pieces. 
Op.  6S  and  Op.  15.     Beautifully  printed  on  plates  of  full  sheet  music  f:I?e. 

Schumann's  "Album"  occupies  the  same  field  for  the  learner  which 
Mendelsohn's  *'  Songs  Without  Words  "  does  for  the  advanced  plaver.  It  is 
full  of  bt'utifu'  melodies,  arranged  in  the  manner  so  characteristic  of  its 
author.    P>.je,  c'oth,  $1.75;  paper,  $1.25. 

Schumann's  Album  for  Young  Pianists.  —  Carefully  fingered,  and  con- 
taining  fifty-six  pieces.  Op.  63  and  Op.  15.  Elegantly  engraved  from  plates 
of  full  sheet  music  size,  and  known  among  the  profession  as  the  "Russell 
Engraved  Edition."     Price,  cloth,  $2.50. 

N.  B.—  Many  editions  of  Schumann's  "  Album  "  are  confined  to  his  Op.  68, 
and  contain  but  forty-throe  pieces.  The  above  editions  contain  ooth  Op.  68 
and  Op.  15;  in  all,  fifty-six  pieces. 

MISCELLANEOUS  COLLECTIONS. 

PIANO    CLASSICS. 

A  BOOK  OJT  GEMS  EY  THE  BEST  COMPOSERS. 
A  Collection  of  44  Piano  Pieces  of  Unusual  Merit.— Tho  publishers 
esteem  themselves  very  fortunate  in  having  found  among  their  more  recent 
sheet  music  so  many  pieces  of  true  "  classical  "  beauty.  While  pleasing  to  all, 
they  will  be  especially  welcome  to  players  of  ability  and  taste,  who  wish  to 
find  new  music  which  is  on  a  line  with  that  of  the  "  masters." 

The  composers  whose  works  are  found  in  this  very  superior  book 
are  masters  in  their  way,  and  their  compositions  are  sure  to  satisfy  those  who 
love  good  music. 

While  the  music  of  Piano  Classics  Is  of  a  high  character,  it  Is  only 
moderately  difficult.    Price,  hoards,  $1.00;  cloth,  full  gilt,  $2.0C. 

THE    CLASSICAL    PIANIST. 

42  Choice  Classics  for  the  Pianoforte. — The  music  is  not  of  exceeding 
difficulty,  but  it  is  such  as  will  please  players  of  cultivated  taste,  and  afford 
genuine  pleasure  to  all  who  like  artistic  piano  music.  Price,  boflrds,  $1.00;  full 
gilt,  $2.00. 

YOUNG    PEOPLE'S    CLASSICS. 

52  Easy  Classics  for  the  Pianoforte.  —  Nominally  for  young  pupils, 
but  really  just  the  thing  for  pupll3  and  players  of  all  ages  who  can  only  conquer 
easy  music,  and  still  wish  for  something  a  step  above  the  enmnaon  easy  popular 
airs.  Fifty-two  pieces,  by  Lichner,  Lange,  Kullak,  Spludler,  Oesten,  Schumann, 
Reinecke,  Loeschhorn,  Schubert,  Heller,  Beethoven,  Mendelssohn,  and  others. 
A  grand  collection  of  easy  music  that  is  good,  and  which  will  improve  tho 
taste  as  well  as  please  tho  young  piaulat.  Price,  board  covers,  $1.00;  cloth, 
gilt,  $2.00. 

THALBERG'S   L'AKT  DTJ    CHANT. 

In  this  elegant  book  will  be  found  transcriptions  by  SIglsiaund  Thalberg  (the 
great  pianist)  of  the  following-named  melodies: — 

1.  Quatuor  from  "  Purll.anl."  6.  "  Percheml  Gnardl,'     from  Zelmlra. 

2.  "Tre  Giorni,"  An  air  by  Pergolese.    7.  "  Bella  adorata,"  frc  n  Uluramento- 

3.  "  Adelaide,"  by  Beethoven.  8.  "  Nei  Silcnzio,"  from  Crociftto- 

4.  "Air  d'Kglisc,"  from  Stradella.         9.  "Elnsam  bin  ich  nlcht,"  fromf-Pro- 

5.  Lacrvmosa,  from  Mozart's  Requiem  closa. 

and  a  duo  from  Figaro.  10.  "  Le  M tinier  etle  Torrent,"  by  Schu- 

bert. 
All  these  transcriptions  exemplify  tho  "art  of  singing  as  applied  to  the 
piano."    In  other  words,  they  show  how  a  piano  may  bo  made  to  respond  to 
tho  touch  In  as  sympathetic  a  manner  as  docs  the  voice  to  the  efforts  cf  tit* 
cultured  vocalist.  Price,  cloth,  $4.00. 

LOW'S    PRACTICAL    COURSE    IN    FOUR-HAND 
PIANO    PLAYING. 

A  progressive  and  thoroughly  practical  set  of  exercises  for  two 
play  on  ono  piano,  or  for  teacher  and  pupil  together,  by  Joseph  Low 
contains,  besides  tho  exercises,  a  varied  collection  of  pretty  melod! 
as  piano  ducts.     To  be  used  In  connection  with  any  pianoforte  1: 
more  especially  with  Kohler's  Btudlcs.    Price,  75  cents. 

BOSTON : 
OLIVER    DITSON    COMPANY 

NEW  YORK:  CHICAGO!  1'HII.A:  HOST' 

C  H.  DitsoB  &  Co,  Lyon  &  My.  I.  E.  Diison  &  Co.  mini  a 


NEW  AND  IMPROVED 


METHOD 


fat 

2. 
/  7S3 


FOR    THj 


.  O&HCIASSI, 


BOSTON  i 


NEW  YORK: 


Oliver   Ditson  Company. 


CHICAGO: 


PHILADELPHIA: 


C.  H.  DITSON  &  CO.        LYON  &  HEALY.        J.    E. 

Entered  according  to  the  act  of  Confess  .„  the  year  .«,  by  0ur»  i,,t...  ,  Co..  „,  the  Cck's  0.1 


BOSTON: 


, 


DITSON  &  CO.         JOHN  C.  HAYNES  &  CO. 

of  Hie  District  Court  of  the  District  of  Massachusetts. 


) 


CARCASSTS  INSTRUCTIONS   FOR  THE  GUITAR. 


6 


Character  and  Value  of  the  Notes  and  Rests. 

There  are  seven  forms  of  Notes,  each  having  a  different 
i  ilue.  By  the  value  of  a  note,  is  understood,  the  duration  of 
lound  which  it  represents ;  tills  duration  is  determined  by  the 
'orm  of  the  note  itseif.  Each  of  these  notes  has  a  Rest  or 
i.lence,  whbh  corresponds  with  it  in  value  or  duration. 


i 


Semibreve. 

Ronde. 


Figure  et  Valeur  des  Notes  et  des  Silences 

Les  figures  des  notes  sont  au  nomore  Cm  »epl,  >ui  son  Vsepi 
valeurs  differentes ;  on  entend  par  la  valeur  d'une  note,  la  duree 
que  doit  avoir  le  son  qu'elle  produit ;  cette  duree  est  determinee 
par  la  figure  de  la  note  meme.  Chacune  des  sept  figures  da 
notes,  a  un  silence,  qui  lui  correspond  en  valeur,  c'est-a-dire,d< 
la  meme  duree. 

Semibreve  Rest. 
Pause. 


Which  is  equal  to  2  Minims, 
Une  Ronde  vaut  deux  Blanches, 


Silence  qui  vaut  une  Ronde. 

Minim  Rest. 
Demi  Pause. 


=£ 


or  4  Crotchets, 

ou  quatre  Noires, 


Qui  Taut  une  Blanche 

Crotchet  Rest. 

Soupir. 


or  8  Quavers, 

ou  huit  Croches, 


Qui  vaut  une  Noire. 

Quaver  Rest. 
Demi  Soupir. 


or  16  Semiquavers, 
ou  16  Doubles  Croches, 


Qui  vaut  une  Croche. 

Semiquaver  Rest. 
Quart  de  Soupir. 


i 


5 


Ot  32  DEMI8EMIO,UA VEK8, 

ou  82  Triples  Croches. 


Qui  vaut  une  Double  Croche. 

Demisemio.ua ver  Rest. 
Demi  quart  de  Soupir. 


m 


Sixty-four  Hemidemisemiquavers  are  equivalent  to  one  Semi- 
Weve. 

Of  the  Dot. 

The  Dot,  placed  immediately  after  a  note  or  rest,  increases 
Us  value  one  half.     Thus,  a  dotted  Semibreve  is  equal  to  three 

ZTl  ,a  i°"ed   miDim  1S  6qUal  t0  three  Crotchets>    *  dotted 
^rotchet  to  three  quavers,  a  dotted  quaver  to  three  semiquavers, 

oft^s™"  d0t  'Sadded'  ftS  ValUe  "  eqUal  t0  half  tha< 


Dotted  Semibreve 
Ronde  pointee. 


Qui  vaut  unel 


Les  quadruples  Croches  sont  barrees  quatre  fois,  il  en  feut 
soixante  quatre  pour  une  Ronde. 

Dn  Point. 

Le  point  plaoee  immediatement  apres  une  note,  ou  un 
silence,  augmente  de  moitie  sa  valeur ;  ainsi,  la  ronde  pointee, 
vaut  trois  blanches,  la  blanche  pointee,  trois  noires,  la  noire 
pointee,  trois  croches,  la  croche  pointee,  trois  doubles  croches 
<fcc. 

II  arrive  quelquefois  qu'on  met  deux  points  a  la  suite  d'uu« 
note ;  le  second  point  alors,  augmente  de  moitie  la  valeur  dv 
premier. 


Dotted  Minim. 
Blanche  pointee. 


Dotted  Crotchet. 
Noire  pointee. 


Dotted  Quaver. 
Croohe  pointee. 


Dotted  Semiquaver.       |  Dotted  Demisemiquaver.  |     Dotted  Rests 
Double  Croche  pointee.  |  Triple  Croohe  pointee.       |     Silences  pointer 


3  Pauses. 


i  Pause*. 


6 


CaRCASSI'S  instructions  for  the  GUITAR 
Of  Time. 


Time  is  die  division  of  any  piece  of  Music  into  parts  of  equal 
duration.  There  arc  three  principal  measures  ;  the  measure  of 
four  beats  of  three  beats,  and  of  two  beats  in  a  bar  ;  all  the 
others  are  derived  from  these  three,  and  are  called  Compound 
Measures. 

The  Measure,  or  Time,  is  marked  at  the  commencement  of 
every  piece  of  Music  by  signs  or  by  numbers,  indicating  the 
subdivisions  of  the  measure.  The  Staff  is  divided  by  vertical 
mes  into  separate  parts,  called  Bars  of  measure. 

Examples  of  different  measures,  the  manner  in  which  they 
are  marked  at  tb»  ueginning  of  each  piece  of  music,  and  the 
method  of  beating  time. 


De  la  Mesure. 

La  Mesure  e'est  le  partage  en  portions  d'urje  egalf  ~tuee  a« 
tout  morceau  de  musique. 

II  y  a  trois  mesures  principales  ;  la  mesure  a  quane  tern*,  l» 
mesure  a  trois  tems,  et  la  mesure  a  deux  terns ;  toutes  les  autrei 
sont  derivees  de  ces  trois  premieres,  et  se  nomment  mesures 
composees. 

La  mesure  se  marque  au  commencement  de  chaque  morceau. 
par  des  signes,  ou  par  des  chiffres  qui  indiquent  de  combien  ds 
tems  elle  est  composee.  Les  mesures  se  separent  par  des  barres 
verticales,  appellees  barres  de  mesure. 

Exemples  de  differentes  mesures,  comme  elles  sont  indiquees 
au  commencement  de  chaque  morceau,  et  maniere  de  le; 
battre. 


-i£*4 


Common  Time,  or  4  beats 
in  a  bar,  is  marked  by  a  ^-, 
uid  is  beaten  thus, 

Triple  Time,  or  3  beats 
\.  J  bar,  is  marked  |,  and  is 
Deaten  thus, 

Two-four  Time,  or  2 
jeats  ill  a  bar,  is  marked  f , 
»nd  is  beaten  thus, 


Twelye-eight  Time,  derived  from  Com- 
mon Time,  is  marked  y,  and  is  beaten  in 
our  divisions. 

Nine-eight  Time  is  derived  frm  Triple     T 
Time,  is  marked  §,  and  J-D'eaten  in  three 
divisions.  ^ 


Six-eight  Time,  is  derived  from  Two-four 
Time,  is  marked  §,  and  is  beaten  in  two  divi- 
sions. 

A  Bar  of  two  beats,  called  "  alla  breve,"  and 
inaiked  by  a  0  or  •>,  is  beaten  in  two  divisions, 
Kid  is  the  same  value  as  common  time. 


Three-eight  Time,  is  marked  jj,  and  is  beaten 
Du  t\;ree  divisions. 


Of  the  Triplet. 

The  Triplet  is  a  group  of  three  notes,  over 
vliijh  the  figure  3  is  placed ;  these  three  notes 
ire  jilayed  in  the  time  of  two  of  the  same  denom- 
r.ation. 

y\  hen  the  figure  6  is  placed  over  a  group  of 
P'jt  qotes,  it  indicates  that  these  six  notes  have 
out  the  value  A  four. 


t* 


-8      4  I      3t S 3 4—jrr 


\ 


Mesure  a  4  tems  ;  elle  se 
marque  par  un  -0,  et  se  bat 
ainsi, 

Mesure  a  3  tems  appellee 
trois  quatre  ;  elle  se  marque 
par  un  £,  et  se  bat  ainsi, 

Mesure  a  2  tems  appellee 
deux  quatre ;  elle  se  marque 
par  un  |,  et  se  bat  ainsi, 


Mesure  a  donze  huit,  de.rivtie  dela  mesme 
-ajfflHafaWrtffins  ;  elle"  se  marqi" 
se  bat  a  quatre  tems. 

Mesure  a  neuf  huit,  derivet  ac  ial 
a  trois  tems  ;  elle  se  marque  par  un 
bat  a  trois  tems. 


Mesure  a  six  huit,  derivee  de  la  mesure  a 
tems ;  elle  se  marque  par  un  g,  et  se  bat  a 
tems. 


deu 


in 


<?z: 


~a 


m 


H- 


m\ 


Triplet.    Value. 
Triolet       Meme  valeur. 


Mesure  a  deux  tems,  appellee  "  alla  breve," 
elle  se  marque  par  un  -gr  on  2,  elle  se  bat  a  deux 
tems,  et  se  compose  des  memes  valeurs  que  .a 
mesure  a  4  tems. 

Mesure  a  trois  huit,  elle  se  maitque  par  nil  ^, 
et  se  bat  a  trois  tems. 


Du  Triolet. 

Le  Triolet  est  une  groupe  de  trois  note*    in 
dique  par  le  chiffre  3  dont  il  est  surmonte  ,  ^e 
trois  notes  doivent  etre  faites  pour  la  va.eui  de 
deux. 

Lorsque  six  notes  sont  surmontee?  d  un  6 
elles  n'ont  la  valeur  que  de  quatre. 


alue. 
Meme  valeur 


OAKOASBI'8    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAK. 


Of  the  Legato  or  Slnr,  the  Tie  and  Syncopation. 

These  three  terms  are  indicated  by  a  curved  line,  connecting 
nveral  notes  together. 


Sutured  Notes  By  this  we  under- 
ttand  seveial  notes  formed  ir>  succession 
by  a  single  vibration 

Tied  Notes.  The  Tie  indicates  that 
the  notes  should  be  held  out  through  their 
whole  value,  as  far  as  the  sign  extends. 


Dn  Coulf,  de  la  Liaison  et  de  la  Syncope. 

Ces  trois   iinominations  se  marquent  par  an  trait  recount* 
• — ~" — _  qui  lie  plusieurs  notes  ensemble 


Notes  Coulees.  On  entend  parcoult 
plusieurs  notes  faites  successivement  pa 
une  seule  vibration. 

Notes    Liees.      La   Liaison    indiqu 
qu'il  faut  tenir  les  notes  de  toute  leu: 
valeur  pezidant  la  duree  du  signe. 


Syncopated  Notes.  Syncopation  is 
the  binding  of  the  unaccented  part  of 
a  measure  with  the  accented  part  of 
the  measure  following,  so  that  it  ah 
forms  one  note. 


I 


Notes  Synuopees.  On  entend  pai 
syncope  une  note  qui  se  partage  egale 
ment  entre  la  partie  faible  d'un  terns  e 
la  partie  forte  du  tems  suivant. 


Of  the  Sharp,  Flat  and  Natural.      ^ 

The  Sharp  (#)  is  a  sign  which  raises  a  note  a  semitone. 
The  Flat  (b_)  lowers  it  a  semitone  ;  and  the  Natural  (^)  restores 
b  note,  altered  by  a  sharp  or  flat,  to  its  original  sound. 

A  sharp  or  fiat  placed  before  a  note,  is  called  an  Accidental, 
and  acts  only  in  the  bar  in  which  it  occurs. 

When  these  signs  are  placed  at  the  commencement  of  a  piece 
of  music,  namely,  at  the  Clef,  to  point  out  its  tone^all  the  notes 
which  are  on  the  same  line  or  space,  on  whioh  these  signs-  are 
placed,  are  affected  by  them. 

There  are  as  many  sharps  and  flats  as  there  are  notes ;  the 
sharps  are  placed,  beginning  with  F,  by  fifths  ascending  and  by 
fourths  descending. 

The  flats  are  placed,  beginning  with  B,  by  fourths  ascending 
«ud  by  fifths  descending. 


F 

Fa 


C        G 

Ut      Sol 


D        A 
Re      La 


E 

Mi 


Dn  Dieze,  du  Bemol  ct  dn  Becarre. 

Le  Dieze  (#1  est  un  signs  qui  liausse  d'un  demi-ton  l'intonalion 
de  la  note.  Le  Bemol  (b)  la  baisse  d'un  demi-ton,  et  le  Becarre 
(1^)  remet  dans  son  ton  primitif  la  note  alteree  par  le  Dieze  o-< 
le  Bemol. 

Le  Dieze  ou  le  Bemol,  pose  a  cote  d'une  note,  se  nomme 
accidental,  et  n'agite  que  dans  la  mesure  ou  il  est  place. 

Mais  lorsqu'il  est  place  au  commencement  des  morceaux  de 
musique  (ce  qu;on  appelle  a  la  Clef)  pour  en  designer  le  ton 
alofs  toutes  les  notes  qui  portent  le  mome  nom  que  le  degre  oil 
sont  pose  ces  signes,  en  prennent  le  caracttic. 

II  y  a  lutant  de  Diezes  et  de  Bemols  que  de  notes  f°reST©i€&eg^  •• 
se  posent  (en  commencant  par  le  Fa)  par  quinte  en  montetHt-vorj 
par  quarte  en  descendant ;  les  Bemols  se  posent  (en  commeng- 
ant  par  le  Si)  par  quarte  en  montant  ou  par  quinte  en  descendant 


I 


B        E 
Si       Mi 


A 
La 


1) 

Re 


G 

Sol 


C 
Ut 


F 

Fa 


Sz 


:b: 


:br 


I 


1st  Sharp,  2d 
ler  Dieze, 


3d      4th       5th      «th      7th 


1st  Flat     2d 
ler  Bemol, 


3d       4th       5th       6th        7th 


The  double  sharp  (x)  raises  the  note  one  tone,  and  the  double 
Fla.  (bb.)  lowers  it  one  tone. 

Of  the  Intervals. 

The  distance  between  two  sounds  is  called  an  Internal. 


Example.; 

1    Exemple.    ( 


Unison. 
Unisson. 


Second. 
Seconde. 


Third. 
Tieroc. 


1 


m 


II  y  a  aussi  le  double  Dieze  (x)  qui  nausse  la  note  d'un  ion 
et  le  double  B6mol  (hh)  qui  la  baisse  d'un  ton. 

Des  Interval  lev 

On  appelle  intervalle  la  distance  qu'i)  y  a  d'un  son  a  un  auirw 


Fourth. 
Quarte. 


Fifth. 
Quinte. 


Sixth. 
Sixte. 


Seventh. 
Septieme. 


Octave. 

Octavo 


JF=rPii^P^E 


IMfl 


Of  the  Tone  and  Mode  or  Hey. 

The    principal    note    on   which   a   musical   composition   is 
I    latahlished  is  called  the  Key-note,  or  Tonic.     Any  note  can 
w    become  the  Tonic  or  first  note  of  the  Scale 


Dn  Ton  ct  dn  Mode. 

La  principale  note  sur  laquelle  un  morceau  de  musique  esl 
jtabli,  est  appellee  la  note  du  Ton,  ou  Tonique.  Toutes  lei 
notes  peuvent  etre  Toniques  •  c'est-a-arre,  premiere  note  d'une 
E  amine 


r 


oARCASSI'S     INSTRUCTIONS     FOR     THE     GUITAR 


The  modes,  are  the  chaisocer  of  the  Key;  they  are  of  two 
ta»A  ,  the  Major  mode,  wnose  third  is  major,  or  composed  of 
.wo  full  tones,  and  the  Minor  mode,  whose  third  is  minor,  or 
composed  of  a  tone  and  a  semitone. 


Le  mode  est  la  caractere  du  ton  ;  il  y  en  a  deux  especes  ;  k 
Mode  majeur  dont  la  tierce  est  majeure,  c'est=a-dire  compose* 
de  deux  tons  pleins ;  et  le  Mode  mineur  dont  la  tierce  en 
mineure,  c'est-a-dire  composee  d'un  ton  et  d'un  demi-tone. 


Major  Third 
Tierce  Majeur. 


Mihob  Third.i 
Tierce  Minear.  U 


^ 


Of  the  Scales  «r  Gamits. 

There  are  two  kinds  of  Scales,  the  Diatonic  and  the  Chro- 
itatic.  The  Scale  is  Diatonic  when  the  five  whole  tones  and 
two  semitones  which  compose  it,  succeed  each  other  regularly 
Bud  in  the  natural  order,  whether  ascending  or  descending.  It 
is  Chromatic  when  the  five  whole  tones  of  the  Diatonic  Scale 
»re  divided  into  semitones,  so  as  to  form  twelve  of  these  in  the 
compass  of  the  octave. 

In  the  Diatonic  Scale,  the  two  semitones  are  found  between 
the  third  and  fourth,  and  the  seventh  and  eighth  degrees,  in  the 
major  mode ;  and  between  the  second  and  third,  and  the 
seventh  and  eighth,  in  the  minor. 

Scale  of  C  Major,  with  the  tones  and  semitones  which 
compose  it. 

This  scale  may  serve  as  a  model  for  all  the  other  major 
scales. 


Des  Gammes. 

II  y  a  deux  sortes  de  Gammes ;  ia  Diatonique  et  la  Chrcina- 
tique.  La  gamme  est  diatonique  lorsque  les  cinq  tons  et  les 
deux  demi-tons  qui  la  composent  s'enchainent  regulieremenl, 
tant  en  montant  qu'en  descendant,  dans  l'ordre  naturel.  Elle 
est  chromatique  lorsque  les  cinq  tons  de  la  gamme  diatonique 
sont  divises  en  demi-tons  ce  qui  en  formera  douze  dans  Petenduf 
de  l'octave 

Dans  la  gamme  diatonique,  les  deux  demi-tons,  se  trouven- 
du  3e.  au  4e.  degre,  et  du  7e.  au  8e.  dans  les  tons  majeurs ;  « 
du  2e.  au  3e.  degre,  et  du  7e.  au  8e.  dans  les  tons  miueurs. 

Gamme  d'Ut  Majeur,  avec  les  tons  et  les  demi-tons  qui  li 
composent. 

Cette  gamme  doit  servir  de  modele  pour  toutes  les  au«re« 
dans  le  mode  majeur. 


Whole  Tone.Wholo  Tone.Half  Tone.  Whole  Tone.  Whole  T 
Ton.  Ton.        Demi  Ton.     Ton.  Ton. 


Whole  T.  Half  Tone. 
Ton.     Demi  Ton. 


Half  Tone.  Whole  T.  Whole  T.  Whole  T.  Half  T.   Whole  T.  Whole"  r?" 
Demi  Ton.      Ton.  Ton.        Ton.        Demi  Ton.  Ton  Ton. 


Scale  of  A  Minor,  with  the  tones  and  semitones    which 
xnpose  it. 

This  scale  will  serve  as  a  model  for  all  the    other    minor 
•  ales. 


Gamme  de  La  Mineur,  avec  les  tons  et  les  demi-tons  qui  «a 
composent. 

Cette  gamme  servira  de  modele  pour  toutes  les  autres  dans  U 
mode  mineur. 


to. 


Scale  Ascknding. 
Gamme  Montante. 


Tif-rec  Mint-ill** 

:  2 

A  II 

^i"  La  Si 


S 


i 
C 

Ut 


4 

D 

Re 


6 
E 
Mi 


The  6th  and  7th  note 

arc  iilwnyn  raited  hulfn 

£«ie  :«i  the  minor  aralea 

6  7 

FIS  GIS 

Fa  Sol 


-*=. 


8 

A 

La 

-»S>- 


DEecENDiNo  Scale. 
ftftmme  Deseendanto. 
In  descending  the  7th  and  6th  are  restored  totlheir  original  piten 
8769  48  21 

AGFEDC  HA 

La  Sol        Fa  Mi         Re        TJt  Si  La 


Whole  Tone.  Half  Tono    Whole  T. 
Ton.      Dort-i  Ton.        Ton. 


Wholo  T 
Ton. 


Wholo  T.     Wholo  T.  Half  Tone, 
Ton.  Ton.         Demi  Ton 

I  Ln  6o.  et  7o,  note  ion!  I 
I  totljouni  nltcree  dnnn  lea 
]  tmiH  mlnonra. 


Whole  T.   Whole  T.   Half  T.  Wholo  T.   Wholo  T.     HalfT.     Whole  T 
Ton.        Ton.    Demi  Ton.  Ton  Ton.     Demi  Ton.  Ton 

En  descendant  on  aupprlme  ['alteration  de  la  7me  et  6xt« 


The  Key  of  a  piece  of  music  is  indicated  by  the  number  of  >  Le  ton  d'un  morceaude  musique  se  designe  par  le  nimbie  at 
Sharps  or  Plats  which  are  f"»nd  at  the  Clef.  Each  Major  key,  Diezes  on  de  Bemols  qui  se  trouvent  a  la  Clef.  Chaque  ton 
»  lich  I     sail  call  the  prin,  '.     !  kev;  has  its  relative  Minor  key.  [  majeur,  que  j'appellerai  ton  principal    a  nn   ton  mineur  qn  •  In; 

I  est  relatif 


CARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS     FOB    THE    GUITAR. 


a 


It  is  esliad  relative,  jeeause  it  is  marked  at  the  Clef  by  the 
«arae  number  of  Sharps  or  Plats  as  its  principal  key ;  except 
the  key  of  C  major,  and  its  relative  A  minor,  which  have  up 
•ignature. 

The  relative  key  is  a  minor  third  below  its  principal  key,  as 
ii.e  following  table  shows. 

C  Major  Mode.     G  Major.  D  Major.  A  Major. 

Ut  Mode  Majeur.  Sol  Majeur.       R4  Majeur.  La  Majeur. 


On  le  nomme  relatif  parcequ'il  est  indique  a  la  Clef  par  le 
meme  nombre  d'accidents  que  son  ton  principal ;  excepte  le  ton 
d'Ut  majeur,  et  de  La  mineur,  son  relatif,  oil  il  n'y  a  rien  a  la 
CM 

Le  ton  relatif  se  trouve  une  tierce  mineur  au  dessous  de  son 
ton  principal ;  voyez  le  tableau  suivant. 


E  Major. 
Mi  Majeur. 


-e- 


*: 


*=*» 


B  Major. 
Si  Majeur. 


fc* 


Fjj  Major. 
Fati  Maje 


Cj}  Major. 
eur.  UtJS  Majeur. 


A  Minor  Mode.       E  Minor.  B  Minor.  F#  Minor.  Cjf  Minor. 

Lb  Mode  Minenr.  Mi  Mineur.         Si  Mineur.  Fajj  Mineur.  Ut|  Mineur. 


~7g~ 


f- 


-&- 


r- 


.#- 


*= 


'*, 


40E 


fc* 


Gti  Minor. 
Solj}  Mineur. 


Dit  Minor. 
Rett  Mineu 


-Gh- 


*^5=*= 


=*= 


JH 


Ati  Minor. 
Lati  Mineur. 


*?#=* 


=* 


t±=ai 


F  Major  Mode. 
Fa  Mode  Majeur 

— & 


Bt>  Major. 
Si|2  Majeui 


Eb  Major. 
MIJ2  Majeur. 

-h — a 


■Hi- 


AJ2  Major. 
LaJ2  Majeur. 


*± 


35: 


±:F 


Dt?  Major. 
IUt»  Majeur. 


acfe= 


EI^IDZi 


Gfe  Major. 
Soil?  Majeur. 


Cbj  Major. 
Ut)2  Majev. 


-S«- 


*± 


*=fc 


±fc 


1 


D  Minor  Mode. 
Re  Mode  Mineur. 


G  Minor. 
Sol  Mineur. 


C  Minor. 
Ut  Mineur. 


F  Minor. 
Fa  Mineur. 


B)2  Minor. 
Si|?  Mineur. 


El?  Minor. 
MiJ2  Mineur. 


Ab  Minor. 
La|?  Mineur. 


-&- 


b-tr 


H£ 


iLhi 


fe_-b 


*=fc 


*±- 


h-h- 


321 


i 


To  shorten  the  study  of  the  foregoing  tables,  and  to  know  in 
which  key  a  piece  of  music  is,  it  is  necessary  to  know  that 
when  there  are  no  flats  or  sharps  at  the  Clef,  it  is  in  C  major  or 
A  minor  ;  with  the  #,  the  major  key  is  one  semitone  above  the 
last  sharp  placed  at  the  Clef;  and  the  minor  key  two  semitones 
below  it ;  with  the  b_,  the  major  key  is  five  semitones  below 
the  last  b_  in  the  signature,  and  the  minor  key  four  semitones 
above. 

To  know  whether  we  are  in  the  principal  key  of  the  major 
mode,  or  in  its  relative  minor,  it  is  necessary  to  examine  whether 
the  fifth  of  the  major  key  is  accidentally  altered  by  a  sharp  or 
natural ;  if  not,  we  are  in  the  principal  major  key  ;  if  it  is 
altered,  we  are  in  the  relative  minor. 

Of  Abbreviations. 

To  abbreviate  is  to  represent  several  notes  by  a  single  one, 
a  bf  a  single  sign. 


J  J  J  J.JTnJ53 


221 


Pour  abreger  l'etude  des  tableaux  precedens,  et  savoir  dans 
quel  ton  est  un  morceau,  on  remarquera  que  lorsqu'il  n'y  a  rien 
a  la  Clef,  il  est  en  Ut  majeur  ou  en  La  mineur ;  avec  les  $  Is 
ton  majeur  est  un  degre"  au  dessus  du  dernier  #,  pose  a  la  Clef; 
et  le  ton  mineur  deux  degres  au  dessous ;  avec  les  b_  le  ton 
majeur  est  cinq  degres  plus  bas  que  le  dernier  h  pose  a  !a  Clef, 
et  le  ton  mineur  quatre  degres  plus  haut. 

Pour  counaitre  si  l'on  est  dans  le  ton  principal,  mode  majeur, 
ou  dans  son  ton  relatif,  mode  mineur,  il  faut  chercher  dans  lea 
premieres  mesures  du  morceau  si  la  quinte  du  ton  majeur  est 
alteree  accidentellement  par  un  £  ou  par  un  ^ ;  si  elle  ne  I'est 
pas,  on  est  dans  le  ton  principal,  mode  majeur ;  et  si  elle  est 
alteree,  on  sera  dans  le  ton  relatif  mode  mineur. 

Des  Abbreviations. 

Abreger  c'est  representer  plusieurs  notes  par  une  seule  note 
ou  par  un  seul  signe. 


faw- 


JSL 


^g 


mmm 


3^*3 


S 


^ff 


2* 


The  Pause  t^  is  placed  over  notes  and  rests,  and  denotes 
d**  the  performer  may  stop  at  pleasure. 


ua1 


i 


Le  Point  d'orgue  t>  se  place  indistinctement  sur  les  not* 
et  sur  les  pauses ;  il  indique  que  l'on  pert  s'arreter  a  volonte. 


^m 


io 


CARCASSI'S     INSTRUCTIONS     FOR     THE    ttuirAR. 


The  R*,EiT  uAdicates  that  the  part  1Sto  be  repeated.  When 
he  dot,  are  before  the  bar,  the  previous  division  is  to  be 
epeated ;  when  after  the  bar,  the  division  following 


^^^ 


Da  Cafo,  ;r  D.  C,  indicates  that  the  piece   is  to  be  played 
again  from  t.ie  beginning. 

The  Sign  g  indicates  that  the  piece  is  to  be  repeated  to  the 

word  Fjjte. 


Signs  Indicating  the  Degree  of  Power. 

viano  or  p  means  sweet,  soft,     mf halfloud 

very  soft,     sfz  ...    suddenly/. 

=r     •     .       increase. 
~"  decrease. 


•  loud.     cres.  ■ 
very  loud,     dim.: 


S,onEs  DI :  RENvo,s.     Indiquem       ,a 
de  mus.que  du  cote  ou  sont  places  ies  points. 


ifMf 


ment!  CAP°  °"  °"  &  """^  qU'11  faUt  rePrendre  ™«»»me,I0. 

Le  RENvo.  .$•  indiquequ'ilfaut  reprendre  le  morceaa  a  « 
signe  jusqu'au  mot  Pin.  ""iceac  a  ce 

Signes  Indiqnant  Ies  Nuances. 

Lepjawoou^veutdiredoux.     mf                             a      ■  r 
Les  2  »n                   .         •              J     '     '     '     *          demi  fon 
Uf2PP    '     •     *    tres  P*no.    ,yjs forc. 

Les  2  ^   '     "     "     "    ;  -    5°rt"     "'^ augments 

LeS2#      .     .     .     .tresfort      d.m     ^  ^     dimin^ 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  THE  GUITAR. 

MfiTHODE  DE  GUITARE. 


FIRST  PART. 
Manner  in  which  the  Gnitar  is  Strung  and  Tuned. 

The  Guitar  has  six  strings  ;  the  three  first  of  which  are  Gut 
«nd  the  three  others  of  silk,  covered  with  silver  wire  They 
are  tuned  by  Fourths,  with  exception  of  the  third  string,  which 
is  tuned  a  Third  below  the  second 


PREMIERE  PARTIE 
Maniere  dont  la  Guitare  est  Monti*  et  Accordee. 

La  Guitare  est  montee  avec  six  cordes,  dont  Ies  trois  premiere, 
ont  en  boyau,  et  les  trois  autres,  en  soie  filee  d'argem    Tout« 


Gut  Strings. 
De  boyau- 


Coveked  Strings.- 
De  soie  filee  d'argent 


■S>- 


rsr 


Manncr  of  holding  the  Guitar,  and  the 
Position  of  the  Hands. 

liJP°hh0hld  I"  Gutat  WeU'  k  "  neCeSSarF  '0 -ton  a  seat  a 
Ut  le  higher  than  those  in  common  use;  the  left  foot  to  rest  on 
*  stoo.,  of  a  height  proportioned  to  the  seat ;  throw  out  the  right 

altrt?Winv  ,!hef00taliUle;  the,eA  l°S  t0  Preserve  its 
aatural  portion  ;  the  weight  of  the  body  of  the  instrument  to 
W  principally  in  the  left  thigh 


Maniere  de  s'asseoir  pour  Tcnir  la  Guitare, 
et  Position  des  Mains. 

«ur  la  euisse  gauche  grande    |,aru. 


OARCASSI'S     INSTRUCTIONS     FOR    THE    GUITAR 


II 


Being  thug  seated,  the  Guitar  is  placed  transversely  on  the 
!sft  thigh,  as  seen  in  the  drawing. 

This  position  is  preferable  to  all  others,  because  it  offers  three 
points  of  support  to  the  instrument,  and  balances  it  so  as  not  to 
require  the  support  of  the  hands. 

The  Left  Hand. 

The  left  hand  should  lightly  press  the  Neck  between  the 
thumb  and  the  fore  finger ;  the  end  of  the  thumb  should  rest 
on  the  side  next  to  the  thick  string,  between  the  1st  and 
2nd  frets,  and  the  large  joint  of  the  fore  finger  between  the 
Nut,  the  end  of  the  finger  board,  and  the  1st  fret,  on  the  side 
next  to  the  small  string. 

The  arm  should  hang  naturally,  with  the  elbow  separated 
from  the  body,  taking  care  to  hold  the  fore  arm  and  wrist 
curved ;  the  fingers  should  be  separated,  and  held  as  hammers 
ready  to  strike  thn  strings  between  the  four  first  frets. 

The  fingers  in  this  position  will  naturally  fall  upon  the  three 
first  strings  ;  when  they  are  required  to  reach  the  other  three 
xtrings,  the  wrist  should  be  still  more  curved,  and  the  thumb 
put  more  under  the  neck.  The  thumb  is  also  used  sometimes 
to  press  on  the  6th  string  for  particular  notes ;  when  to  be  tnus 
used,  the  word  thumb  will  be  placed  under  the  notes. 

The  Right  Hand. 

The  right  fore  arm  should  rest  on  the  edge,  formed  by  the 
side  and  the  sound  board,  in  the  direction  of  the  Bridge  ;  the 
little  finger  should  be  extended  and  rest  lightly  on  the  sound 
board,  near  the  first  string,  and  a  little  distant  from  the  bridge. 
The  thumb  should  be  extended  and  placed  on  one  of  the  cov- 
ered strings,  the  three  other  fingers  a  little  curved  to  be  held 
over  the  gut  strings.  Moving  the  hand  towards  the  Rosette, 
the  tone  of  the  Guitar  will  be  much  softened. 


manner  of  Touching  the  Strings. 

The  strings  are  made  to  vibrate  with  the  Thumb,  1st,  2d, 
ind  3d  fingers.  The  6th,  5th,  and  4th  strings,  on  which  are 
played  most  frequently,  what  are  called  bass  notes,  are  played 
with  the  thumb ;  the  three  other  strings  are  played  in  the 
Gamuts  and  phrases  of  melody  with  the  1st  and  2d  fingers 
alternately,  changing  the  finger  at  each  note ;  the  3d  finger 
'">  used  oniy  in  Chords  and  Arpeggios  of  4,  5  and  6  notes. 

To  obtain  a  full  and  mellow  tone,  it  is  necessary  to  apply 
some  force  with  the  end  of  the  finger,  avoiding  to  touch  the 
strings  with  the  nails,  the  fingers  meet  the  strings  obliquely,  so 
as  to  cause  them  to  vibrate  across  the  finger  board. 

The  thumb  of  the  right  hand,  in  striking  the  thick  strings, 
Rtiould  always  slide  to,  and  rest  upon  the  string  next  to  the  one 
made  to  vibrate,  and  should  not  be  removed  but  to  strike  the 
next  note  ;  except  in  cases  where  the  string  on  which  it  has 
Hided  should  be  made  to  vibrate  by  another  finger  immediately 
kfter,  when  the  thumb  ought  to  strike  the  string  without  touch- 
ing anv  ither 


One  fois  bien  assis  de  cette  maniere,  on  pose  la  Guitare  trans* 
veiScucOieiii  am  in  cuissc  gauche,  comme  le  demontre  la  planch* 
precedente  ;  cette  position  est  preferable  a  toute  autre  parce- 
qu'elle  offre  trois  points  d'appui  a  l'instrument,  qui  se  trouve  <n 
equilibre  sans  oue  les  mains  soient  obligees  de  le  retenir. 

Main  Ganche. 

La  main  gauche  doit  presser  legerement  le  manche  entrc  le 
pouce  et  l'index,  l'extremite  dn  pouce  doit  poser  du  cote  dea 
grosses  cordes  entre  la  Ire  et  la  2me  touche,  et  la  grande  pha- 
lange de  l'index  entre  le  sillet  et  la  Ire  touche  du  cote  de  la 
chanterelle.  On  doit  laisser  tomber  naturellement  la  partie 
superieure  du  bras,  ecarter  le  coude  du  corps  en  ayant  soin  de 
tenir  l'avant  bras  et  le  poignet  un  peu  arrondis.  Les  doigt« 
doivent  se  tenir  ecartes,  et  en  forme  de  marteaux  au  dessus  des 
cordes,  prets  a  se  poser  sur  les  quatre  premieres  touches  ;  les 
doigts,  dans  cette  position,  tombent  naturellement  sur  les  trois 
premieres  core'es  ;  lorsqu'ils  doivent  atteindre  les  trois  dernieres, 
il  est  necessaire  d'arrondir  davantage  le  poignet,  et  de  placer  le 
pouce.  plus  au  dessous  du  manche. 

On  se  sert  aussi  quelquefois  du  pouce  de  cette  main,  poui 
doigter  quelques  notes  a  la  6me  corde,  du  cote  oppose  aux  autres 
doigts.  Les  notes  qui  doivent  etre  doigtees  ainsi  sont  indiqueea 
par  le  mot  pouce,  que  l'on  place  au  dessous  des  notes  memo 

Main  Droitc. 

L'avant  bras  droit  doit  s'appuyer  sur  le  bord  lo  le  pai 
l'eclisse  et  la  table  d'harmonie,  dans  la  direction  du  c  evalet. 
Le  petit  doigt  doit  un  peu  s'ecarter,  et  se  poser  legerement  sin 
la  table  d'harmonie  pres  de  la  chanterelle  a  peu  de  distance  du 
chevalet.  Le  pouce  se  tiendra  allonge  et  en  dehors  des  autres 
doigts,  et  posera  sur  une  des  cordes  filees  ;  les  trois  autres 
doigts,  un  peu  recourbes,  se  tiendront  au  dessus  des  trois  cordes 
de  boyau.  Lorsqu'on  vein,  adoucir  le  son  de  la  Guitare,  on 
porte  la  main  vers  la  Rosette. 

Maniere  de  Pineer  les  Cordes. 

On  se  sert  de  quatre  doigts  pour  pineer  les  coides  de  Ta  Gui- 
tare ;  ce  sont :  le  pouce,  l'index,  le  medium  et  1  annulaire. 
Les  6me,  5me  et  4me  Cordes,  sur  lesquelles,  s'executent  le  plus 
souvent  les  notes  appelees  basses,  se  pincent  du  pouce ;  les  3 
autres  cordes  se  pincent,  dans  les  Gammes  et  les  phrases  d 
melodie,  avec  l'index  et  le  medium  alternativement  en  change- 
ant  de  doigt  a  chaque  note. 

Le  doigt  annulaire  ne  pince  que  dans  les  accords  et  arpege* 
composes  d  *  4,  5  et  6  notes. 

Pour  obtenir  un  son  plein  et  moelleux,  il  faut  pmcei  un  peu 
fort,  mais  sans  roideur  avec  l'extremite  des  doigts  en  evitant  la 
contact  des  ongles  contre  les  cordes,  qui  doivent  etre  pincees 
un  peu  en  biais.  Le  pouce  de  la  main  droite  en  attaquant  les 
grosses  cordes,  doit  toujours  glisser  sur  la  corde  a  cote  de  ce.le 
qu'il  vient  de  pineer,  et  ne  doit  se  relever  que  pour  pineer  uni. 
autre  note,  excepte  pourtant  dans  le  cas  ou  la  corde  sm 
laquelle  il  tombe  serait  mise  en  vibration  par  un  autre  doigt 
dans  le  meme  terns  ou  immedintement  apres.  alois  le  pouce  d<ui 


It, 


12 


CAKOASSI'S     INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAK 


In  some  cases  it  is  necessary  to  play  on  the  3d  and  2d  strings 
with  the  thumb,  and  on  the  4th  and  5th  strings  with  tne  1st 
and  2d  fingers.  This  is  the  case  in  chords,  arpeggios,  &c,  and 
even  in  cantabile  phrases ;  the  notes  to  be  played  with  the 
thumb,  are  written  with  a  double  tail  if  to  be  played  alone,  and 
•with  the  tail  turned  down,  if  double. 


numb  lit 


attaquer  la  corde  sans  en  toucher  aucune  autre  II  y  a  un  gran 
nombre  de  cas  ou  le  pouce  est  oblige  de  pmcer  les  3me  et  2m« 
cordes,  et  l'index  et  le  medium  la  4me  et  meme  la  5me  corde  , 
ces  cas  se  presentent  souvent  dans  les  accords,  les  arpeges,  lei 
passages  de  tierces,  sixtes,  octaves  et  meme  dans  les  phase* 
chantantes;  les  notes  qui  dans  tous  ces  cas,  doivent  etre  pmceea 
du  pouce,  sont  ecrites  avec  une  double  queue  si  elles  frappent 
seules,  et  avec  la  queue  tournee  par  le  bas,  si  les  uties  sonl 
doubles. 


Of  Tuning  the  Guitar. 

An  A  tuning  Fork  is  used  in  tuning  the  Guitar,  to  which  the 
6th  string,  A,  is  tuned;  then  press  the  finger  on  the  same 
string  at  the  5th  fret  of  the  finger  board,  which  will  then  give 
D ;  to  which  the  4th  string  is  to  be  tuned  in  unison.  The 
finger  is  then  to  be  placed  upon  the  5th  fret  of  the  4th  string, 
vrhich  will  give  G,  to  which  the  3d  string  is  to  be  tuned  in 
unison  ;  then  place  the  finger  upon  the  4th  fret  of  the  3d  string, 
which  will  give  B,  to  which  the  2d  string  is  to  be  tuned  in 
unison ;  place  the  finger  on  the  5th  fret  of  the  2d  string,  which 
will  give  E,  to  which  the  1st  string  is  to  be  tuned  in  unison. 
The  6th  string,  E,  is  then  to  be  tuned  to  the  1st  E  string,  but 
»t  the  distance  of  two  octaves  lower. 

EXAMPLE. 


Manicrc  d'Accorder  la  Gnitarc 

Pour  accorder  la  Guitare  on  se  seii  d'un  Diapason  (petit  in- 
strument d'acier  servant  a  donner  le  la  a  tous  les  instruments! 
au  ton  duquel  on  accorde  la  5me  corde  la  ;  on  pose  un  doigt  » 
la  5me  case  de  cette  meme  corde  qui  donne  alors  r6,  et  l'on  ac- 
corde la  4me  corde  a  l'unisson  de  ce  re  ;  on  pose  un  doigt  a  la 
5me  case  de  la  4me  corde  qui  donne  alors  sol,  et  l'on  accorde  i 
l'unisson  la  3me  corde ;  on  pose  un  doigt  a  la  4me  case  de  la 
3me  corde  qui  donne  alors  si,  et  l'on  accorde  la  2me  corde  i 
l'unisson  avec  ce  si ;  on  pose  un  doigt  a  la  Sine  case  de  la  2me, 
corae  qui  donne  alors  mi,  et  l'on  accorde  la  chanterelle  a 
l'unisson  avec  ce  mi.  La  6me  corde  etant  un  mi  aussi,  s'juxord*  j 
avec  la  chanterelle,  mais  a  deux  octaves  d'intervalie. 


5th  String. 
open.       5th  fret 

5me  Corde. 
i  vide.     5me.  case. 


4th  String. 
open.       5th  fret. 

4mk  Corde. 

a  vide.  5me  case. 


3d  String. 
open.     4th  fret 

.1MB    CORDE. 

a  vido.     5me  case. 


2d  String. 
open.     5th  fret. 

2me   Corde. 
a  vide.     5me  case. 


EXEMPLE. 


-INS- 


IST String. 

open. 

Ire  Corde. 

a  vide. 


«TH  SthIKG, 

open 
6m e  Corde, 

a  vide. 


...    I 


A 

U 


6    Unison. 
Sol  UinMon, 


B 

Si 


Unison 
Unisson. 


. 


OARCASSI'S    INSXRLOIlONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR. 


13 


After  having  tuned  the  Guitar  it  is  well  to  prove  it  by  sound- 
ing the  following  octaves 


Apres  avoir  accorde  la  Guitare  par  unissons,  il  est  bon  d< 
verifier  l'accord  en  faisant  resonner  ensemble  les  octaves  wi 
vantes. 


£^=g 


W^% 


± 


-izt 


H 


Jr 


i 


% 


The  following  are  the  signs  used  by  most  authors  who  have 
written  for  the  Guitar,  to  indicate  the  fingering,  and  which  are 
adopted  in  this  work. 

THE  LEFT  HAND. 
0,  Open  string.    1,  Firs;  finger.  2,  Second  finger.  3,  ThM  finger. 

THE  RIGHT  HAND. 
.  First  finger.  .  .  Second  finger.  .  .  .  Third  finger,    x  Thumb. 

The  Positions. 

There  are  as  many  positions  as  there  are  frets  on  the  Finger 
ooard.  It  is  the  1st  finger  that  determines  the  position  in  which 
the  hand  is ;  thus,  when  the  1st  finger  is  placed  on  the  1st  fret, 
the  hand  is  in  the  1st  position,  and  so  on  with  the  other  posi- 
tions. 

GAMUT  SHOWING  THE  NOTES,  AND  THE  EXTENT  OF 
THE  FIRST  POSITION. 

The  figures  placed  over  the  notes  indicate  the  fingers  of  the 
left  hand,  and  also  the  frets  on  which  they  are  to  be  placed. 

The  open  strings  are  indicated  by  0,  the  1st  finger  and 
1st  fret  by  1,  the  2d  finger  and  2d  fret  by  2,  the  3d  finger 
and   3d  fret  by  3,  and  the  4th  finger  and  4th  fret  by  4. 

The  fingers  of  the  right  hand  are  indicated  by  x  for  the 
Thumb,  .  first  finger,   . .  second  finger,  .  .  .  third  finger. 


Pour  eviter  la  multiplicity  embarrassante  des  signes  par  raj 
port  au  doigter,  on  a  juge  a  propos  de  suivre  la  methode  adopts 
par  la  plupart  des  auteurs  pour  la  Guitare.     Par  consequent  on 
se  seivira  dans  la  suite  des  signes  suivans  pour  le  doigter. 

DE  LA  MAIN  GAUCHE. 
0,  corde  a  vide.      1,  index.     2,  medium.     3,  annulaire 

DE  LA  MAIN  DROITE. 
.  index,     .  .  medium,     .  . .  annulaire,  x  pouce. 

Des  Positions. 

II  y  a  autant  de  positions  qu'il  y  a  de  touches  sur  le  manclit- 
c'est  le  premier  doigt  qui  determine  la  position  dans  laquelle  on 
se  trouve.     Ainsi  lorsque  le  ler  doigt  sera  place  a  la  Ire  case  ce 
sera  a  la  Ire  position ;  quand  il  avancera  a  la  2me  case  on  sera 
a  la  2me  position,  et  ainsi  de  suite. 

GAMME  ENSEIGNANT  LES  NOTES,  DANS  L'ETENDUE  DE 
LA  Ike  POSITION. 

Les  chiffres  places  sur  les  notes  indiquent  les  doigts  de  la; 
main  gauche,  et  les  cases  ou  touches  ou  il  faut  les  poser. 

Les  cordes  a  vide  sont  indiquees  par  un  0.  le  ler  doigt  et  li 
Ire  case  par  1,  le  2me  doigt  et  la2me  case  par  2,  le  3me  Joi^: 
et  la  3me  case  par  3,  et  le  4me  doigt  et  la  4me  case  par  4, 

Les  doigts  de  la  main  droite  avec  lesquels  il  faut  pincer,  soiit 
indiques  par  les  signes  x  pouce,  .  index,  .  .  medium,  et  .  .an- 
nulaire. 


sS^ 


NATURAL  POSITION. 


I'  6th  String. 

6me  Corde. 
O  1  3 


5th  String. 

5me  Corde. 

0  2  3 


GAMME  NATURELLE. 


4th  String.  3d  String.        I      2d  String. 

4me  Corde.  Sine  Corde.  2me  Corde. 

02  3lo  3I013 


1st  String. 
Ire  Corde 
0  13  4 


W.  V  sj 


~^L      -J-         "# 


mm 


-m *^ 


m^ 


*=£ 


m 


•  •  •        6th  frei. 

5  in*.  Cart. 


Exercises  in  the  1st  Position. 


v^*-* 


i~n~~r 


3=*=± 


Exercises  pour  apprendre  a  lire  les  notes  a  la  Ire 

l»   I*-  0     •-„ _, . . 


Position. 


=*=F 


■thL 


fip^Pf^^ 


^ 


F  » 


gfr  f  f  f\r-Hj^ 


%. 


14 


CAl  CASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    3UITAR 


M 


Sg 


5Ee£3 


3nf 


*     * 


-,/-     -©- 


£*=*^4MhHj  J  J J  lr 


mz 


rfi 


*=3f 


f^r^^m 


^ra 


gyi^iJ^^p 


Hf 


iju^ 


f 


x 


Gamut  with  Sharps. 


Gamme.     Pour  apprendre  &  lire  les  notes  arec  les  Diezes. 


6th  String. 
6me  Corde. 


5th  String. 
5me  Corde. 


4th  String. 
4me  Corde. 


3d  String. 
Srae  Corde. 


2d  String. 
2me  Corde. 


1st  String. 
Ire    Corde. 


wmfmw^^^'^4 


U^J-WwrFFSPFF^ti 


3  01234  01234 


Gamut  with  Flats. 


6th  String. 
6me  Corde. 


5th  String. 
5me  Corde. 


Gamme.    Pour  apprendre  a  lire  les  notes  avec  les  Beino's. 


4th  String. 
4me  Corde. 


3d  String.  i  2d  String. 

3me  Corde.  j  2me  Corde. 


1st  String. 
Ire  Corde. 


1 


I 


i  iM4  '^m*'^^ 


f^m^ir^^r^i 


Exercise  with  Sharps  and  Flats 


4  O        1        2        3  01234  01234 


Exercise  pour  apprendre  a  lire  les  notes  avec  les  Diezes  et  les  Bemols. 


%=r= 

■ 

1     '" 

=t= 

■  . 

-t-+ 

i"-^ 

I*  fey 

| 

-+■ 

X 

~^r 

$& 

-m- 

4 

X 

-J-W- 

*v 

X 

S7 

4- 

X 

-0- 

X 

-j-± 

4 

4= 

— F 

4= 

# 

• 

44 

-J- 

•  • 

-*— » 


##-  ■     -*-    J-    ••       • " .     ..     .      X     X        •        X 


*=t 


#*=j 


op 


•— L^-S*— # 


f^^ 


S^ 


ffi!g' 


^=^^^3^^^ 


t*#* 


§* 


*sM=^i#^ 


■  > 


CARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR. 


15 


Of  the  Chords. 

1  he  union  of  two  or  more  notes  played  simultaneously  is 
ja.  ed  a  chord. 

If  the  chord  to  be  played  is  composed  of  three  notes,  no  mat- 
ter on  which  strings,  they  are  to  be  played  with  the  thumb,  Is 
and  2d  fingers ;  if  composed  of  four  notes,  the  3d  finger  must  be 
added ;  if  of  five  or  six  notes,  the  thumb  must  play  the  two  or 
three  lowest  notes  by  sliding  from  one  string  to  the  other,  and 
the  fingers  take  the  three  other  strings. 

That  all  the  notes  of  a  chord  may  sound  well,  it  is  necessary 
that  the  fingers  of  the  left  hand  should  be  curved  to  act  as  ham- 
mers, be  pressed  on  the  strings  near  the  frets,  and  without  af- 
fecting the  vibration  of  the  other  strings ;  the  fingers  of  the 
right  hand  should  be  placed  against  the  strings  intended  to  be 
struck,  and  not  to  be  moved  but  to  put  the  strings  in  motion. 

Chords  are  always  divided,  or  played  in  Arpeggios  ;  thus : 
the  notes  are  played  one  after  the  other,  from  the  lowest  to  the 
highest,  but  sufficiently  quick  to  produce  the  effect  of  their 
being  struck  together. 


Des  Accords. 

La  reunion  de  plusieurs  notes  que  l'on  fait  entendre  simui 
tanement  s'appelle  accord. 

Si  l'accord  qu'on  veut  executer  est  compose  de  trois  notes 
quelles  que  soient  les  cordes  sur  lesquelles  il  s'execute,  on  le 
pince  avec  le  pouce,  l'index  et  le  medium ;  s'il  est  de  quatre 
notes,  on  y  ajoute  l'annulaire,  et  s'il  est  de  cinq  ou  six  notes  le 
pouce  pince  en  glissant  les  deux  ou  trois  notes  basses,  et  les 
autres  doigts  pincent  les  trois  autres  cordes. 

Pour  que  toutes  les  notes  d'un  accord  resonnent  bien,  il  faut 
que  les  doigts  de  la  main  gauche,  courbes  en  forme  de  marteaux, 
pressent  les  cordes  pres  des  touches  et  qu'ils  n'-empechent  pas  .a 
vibration  des  autres  cordes  ;  puis  on  placera  les  doigts  de  la  main 
droite  centre  les  cordes  destinees  a  etre  pinc.ees,  et  on  ne  le? 
relevera  que  pour  mettre  ces  cordes  en  osciUation. 

Les  accords  se  font  toujours  un  peu  brises  ou  arpeges  ;  e'est- 
a-dire  en  pingant  les  notes  les  unes  apres  les  autres,  mais  avec 
assez  de  vitesse  pour  qu'elles  produisent  le  meme  effet  que  »' 
elles  etaient  pincees  en  meme  terns. 


Examples. 
Chord  with  S  Notes.     Effect     4  Notes. 


Effect 


5  Notes. 


EXEMPLES. 

Effect.  6  Notes. 


Effect. 


a  3  Notes.    Effet. 


a  4  Notes.     Effet 


a  5  Notes.     Effet. 


a  6  Notes.     Effet 


In  slow  movements  the  chords  are  played,  or  arpeggioed 
slowly,  in  character  with  the  movement,  which  is  often  indicated 
by  this  sign  J,  and  which  is  placed  before  the  chord.  In  quick 
movements,  which  are  to  be  played  with  energy,  and  require 
much  sound  from  the  Guitar,  the  same  sign  is  used  to  indicate 
that  the  thumb  must  be  slid  rapidly  and  with  force  across  the 
strings  which  form  the  chord. 

The  Barrer. 

The  Barrer  is  made  by  pressing  the  1st  finger  on  two  or  more 
strings,  on  the  same  fret. 

There  are  two  Barrers,  the  Great  and  the  Small. 

In  the  small  Barrer  the  first  finger  stops  but  two  or  three 
strings. 

In  the  great  Barrer,  the  first  finger  stops  the  whole  of  the 
»ix  strings. 

To  do  the  great  barrer  with  ease,  it  is  necessary  to  raise  the 
»  irt,  and  to  place  the  thumb  entirely  behind  the  Neck. 


Dans  les  movements  lents,  les  accords  s'arnegent  plus  lenie- 
ment  que  de  coutume,  souvent  on  les  indique  par  ce  signe  J ,  qu* 
l'on  place  a  cote  de  l'accord.  Dans  les  movements  vifs  et  pro- 
nonces,  et  qui  exigent  beaucoup  de  son  de  la  Guitare,  ce  meme 
signe  place  a  cote  d'un  accord,  indique  qu'il  faut  1'  executer  en 
laissant  glisser  rapidement,  et  avec  force,  le  pouce  sur  toutes  lei 
cordes. 

Da  Barre. 

Barrer,  e'est  appuyer  le  premier  doigt  sur  plusieurs  cordes  a 
la  meme  case. 

II  y  a  deux  Barres,  le  grand  et  le  petit.  • 

Dans  le  potit  barre,  le  premier  doigt  ne  barre  que  deux  ou 
trois  cordes. 

Dans  le  grand  barre  le  premier  doigt  barre  tins  toute  c* 
longueur  toutes  les  cordes. 

Pour  faire  facilement  le  grand  barre  il  faut  haiisser  le  poignw 
et  porter  le  pouce  tout-a-fait  derriere  le  manche. 


Small  Barrer. 
Petit  Barre, 


Great  Barre.; 
Grand  Barre  ( 


J 


m^m 


L-^i 


f  ir 


Hi 


UAROASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR. 


Of  Arpeggios. 

An  Arpeggio  is  a  number  of  notes  played  successively  in 
uniform  order,  and  which,  when  united,  form  chords. 

Arpeggios  are  used  on  the  Guitar  beca.ise  they  produce  an 
agreeable  effect  on  the  instrument,  and  as  studies,  they  give 
strength  and  agility  to  the  fingers  of  the  right  hand.  To  execute 
the  Arpeggio  well,  before  making  the  strings  vibrate  the  fingers 
of  the  left  hand  should  be  placed  at  once  on  the  notes  forming 
the  chord  on  which  the  arpeggio  is  to  be  played ;  and  when  the 
last  note  of  the  arpeggio  is  struck,  the  fingers  should  be  raised 
to  pass  to  the  next  chord.  This  rule  is  indispensable ;  if  the 
fingers  were  to  quit  the  notes  as  soon  as  they  are  struck,  the 
vibration  of  the  entire  chord  would  be  obstructed  ;  of  which, 
each  note  is  an  essential  part.  The  fingers  of  the  right  hand 
should  not  touch  the  strings,  but  to  make  them  vibrate ;  with 
exception  of  the  thumb,  as  described  page  1 1. 


ARPEGGIOS  WITH  THREE  AND  FOUR  FINGERS. 

These  Arpeggios  are  given  for  the  purpose  of  exercising 
the  right  hand,  and  to  establish  general  rules,  which  will  serve 
to  show  the  fingering  of  that  hand  in  all  similar  passages. 

Each  Arpeggio  ought  to  be  repeated  several  times  in  succes- 
sion, ana  as  soon  as  the  pupil  is  able  to  execute  several  with 
«ase.  he  may  undertake  the  study  of  the  eight  Arpeggios  at  page 
19,  without  however  abandoning  the  study  of  these. 

The  chords  written  at  the  top,  are  those  from  which  the  22 
lollowing  Arpeggios  are  derived. 


Des  Arpeges  on  Batteries. 

On  appelle  arpeges  ou  batteries,  un  nombre  de  note-  pincer 
successivement  dans  un  ordre  uniforme,  et  qui  reunieg,  forment 
des  accords.  Sur  la  Guitare  les  arpeges  sont  ties  usites  parce- 
qu'ils  produisent  un  effet  agreable  et  particulier  a  l'instrument, 
comme  etude,  ils  donnent  de  la  force  et  de  l'agilite  aux  doisti 
de  la  main  droite. 

Pour  bien  executer  les  arpeges,  il  faut  avant  de  pincer  let 
cordes,  que  les  doigts  de  la  main  gauche  soient  poses  simultane- 
ment  sur  les  notes  formant  1 'accord  sur  lequel  on  arpege  ;  et 
lorsque  la  derniere  note  de  l'arpege  a  ete  frappe,  on  leve  jfes 
doigts  pour  passer  a  un  autre  accord. 

Cette  regie  est  de  rigueur ;  si  les  doigts  quittaient  les  notes 
au  fur  et  a  mesure  qu'on  les  pince,  on  empecherait  la  resonnancc 
complete  de  l'accord  dont  chaque  note  isolee  forme  line  partit 
essentielle. 

Les  doigts  de  la  mam  droite  ne  doivent  toucher  les  cordes 
que  pour  les  mettre  en  vibration,  a  l'exception  du  pouce  ;  voyei 
la  page  11. 

ARPEGES  A  TROIS  ET  A  QUATKE  DOIGTS 
Ces  arpeges  sont  ecrits  dans  le  but  d'exercer  la  main  druite 
et  d'etablir  les  regies  generates  qui  serviront  a  faire  distingue 
le  doigter  de  cette  main  dans  tous  les  passages  analogues. 

Chacun  de  ces  arpeges  doit  etre  repete  plusieurs  fois  de  suite 
Aussitot  l'eleve  commencera  a  en  executer  plusieurs  couramment 
il  pourra  entreprendre  l'etude  des  huit  arpeges  de  la  page  19 
sans  cependant  abandonner  l'etude  de  ceux-ci. 

Les  accords  ecrits  en  tete  ont  servi  a  former  les  vingt  deva 
arpeges  qui  en  derivent. 

i 


n3r 


-t<s- 


Arpeggios  with  3  fingere. 
Arpeges  a  trois  doigts. 


w 


m 


^ 


^t 


r 


No.  1.  fefe 


^m  gj  rfl  i  m  \p  -fP-=& 


t- 


? 


rs=rg*-- 


wm=m\ 


T 


N».  3.  &££ 


mmmm^mmmm 


p< 


No.  4.  &S 


zm^m^^ 


■p 


T 


t 


szjna I  |»  II    <g- 


CAROASSl'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    1H£    GUITAR. 
Arpeggios  with  4  fingers. 
Arpeges  a  quatre  doigta. 


No.  H.S5 


f 


i     i     i     r 


No.  12.&fir 


V  'f- 


The  thumb  gliding  on  the  first  two  notes. 

En  glissant  le  Pouce  Bur  les  deux  Ires  notes 

(l .  .     .....  .___ 


• — :»   !» 


b  r 


No.  1S.IQF 


!      !      I      I 


:g-«-==-iiHr-»  J      J  g  ••  "■^-^  J  I     -  ?T  "• 


r 


if 


^i^l^^^^l 


aN§=E=ff 


H^^^B 


-*— ;r# 


No.  H.&E 


'     -K-fS-  X 


x     -z=)Jx 


rei 


x  x       ^       x  x         ~:      x  x  x  x  ~&- 


With  three  fingers. 
a  trois  doigts. 


No.  15, 


aal-rt  - 


d=a=fB=j=E 


@ 


■4-1- 


#* 


^i 


:fflr 


^f 


J       J 

*  IX 


5 


£      .  r 

With  four  fingers, 
a  quatre  doigts. 


t 


^< 


:^_JI]_T-f^v}--p9-^ 


W  16./OE 


131 


T 


ws^m\ 


1$ 


CAECASSI'S     INSTRUCTIONS     FOB    THE    GUITAR. 


i».  17.  m& 


gj)i  ^^ 


-#-  IX  -0- 

The  thumb  gliding  from  one  string  to  the  other. 
En  laissant  glisser  Ie  Pouee  de  corde  en  corde. 


%».  lS.&fF 


W*  Wx  tiS-oT^rz^-^-^ 


^^m 


ii 


SSJH 


Jr^zc 


^ 


Vo.  19-feBEg 


\ft.20.fe 


No.  31. 


No.  22. 


To  facilitate  the  study  of  the  eight  following  Arpeggios,  and 
the  execution  of  the  left  hand,  I  have  written  on  an  upper  stave 
over  each  bar,  the  chord  which  is  to  be  played  Arpeggio,  as 
written  on  the  stave  below.  The  pupil  will  see  at  a  glance, 
Ihe  chord  composing  the  Arpeggio,  and  on  which  notes  the 
fingers  are  to  be  placed. 


=w 


mm 


wmm=m 


Pour  faciliter  I 'etude  de  ces  huit  arpeges,  et  le  mecanisme  de 
la  main  gauche,  j'ai  ecrit  sur  une  portee  superieure  dans  la 
meme  mesure,  les  accords  plaques  qui  sont  detailles  audesse  is 
en  arpeges.  Avant  d'executer  les  arpeges,  1'eleve  saura  deja  o.i 
sont  les  accords  qui  les  composent  et  sur  lesquels  il  faut  posei 
les  doigts  parunseul  mouvement.    Les  points  qui  lient  les  notes 


The  dotted  lines  from  one  chord  to  the  other,  serve  to  show  d'un  accord  a  l'autre  servent  a  indiquer  que  le  doigte  de  ces 
lhat  the  fingering  of  these  notes  has  not  changed,  and  that  the  J  notes  n'a  point  change  dans  l'accord  suivant :  les  doigts  qui  les 
fingers  which  press  them  must  remain  unmoved.  '  pressent  doivent  rester  immobiles. 


No.l. 


W 


'ST 


3TC21 


s: 


-Ig 


a: 


4g= 


3E2 


-*s>- 


"  follow. 


-&- 


-5Z2- 


II      i     I     I  '    i     l     I      il 


wm. 


#± 


Wa 


¥ 


Sjgffcfefegf^i^g, 


ft-^- 


3g= 


3d 


-*s>- 


i 


m 


pgkgBgkfiMfi^ffl&g^&P^n 


\».  2. 


.ia. 


CAECASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS     FOB    THE    GUITAR 


=g= 


5^ 


19 


3ST 


.^^^^^tfH^PfTAT^ 


=$=*? 


4 P 


S=J3 


2H 


rOO 


!5& 


I 

4gj  -"  ~^4jg 


3S 


-as;- 


3S 


-T*3~ 


^H 


»lS- 


3j5r 


#amgg^ 


5 


.<••  3. 


No.  4. 


=E:  #  #  ^ 


iO 


*•   5. 


CARCASSI'S     INSTRUCTIONS     FOR    THB    GUITAR 


-*s>- 


1 


"27" 


!?■ 


3=' 


r-      r-      r-      r- 


^^^^^^■^^H^ 


a 


r 


-6^ 


ZZSEL 


*flS 


1#S>-  ' 


4S- 


TS^T 


•p- 


s  : 


^1 


c*r* 


£=*: 


^ — *-r 


s^ 


•jid •- 


EM 


~r 


mm 


PF=t=b 


:i*=±*i 


?* 


tf==r=t*trM==r, 


No.  6, 


Small  barrer 

-*d~. — 


petit   I       ban-e. 


Scr 


nS: 


-as- 


— *4 


1 


iai 


£££ 


1  !  J  !  | 


^m^m 


w- 


3i^ 


1SE 


30-   • 


**!- 


as 


^fe 


^H|-7 


te 


a#-  • 


ta« 


±3 


a 


^  ^  -,-■         -=p  "V  J. 


^a 


No 


J 


~T« 


B — 


=±m 


f^s — ^^Ss- 


4*3- 


:il 


¥         #  #  3  t*  -F 


1 


-ts 


:fc?S- 


^ 


*«©_ 


"3SJ- 


-*#£*- 


S^2 


S^r 


I 


"      I      *l      4 


I        i        i 


?  =t  -.«-  «F 


i3 


P^rf? 


"JARCASSsI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR. 


gg~ 


~=r*S- 


-±ez_ 


?£jb&z 


-SO:- 


-~i#=r 


Vo.  8. 


-*&- 


_Afi«!_ 


*q§- 


-W 


j-h-h-14 


&mFmmm 


t 


===== 


-*#» 


gtg= 


#— -#■ 


^^ 


S^Jgg, 


r 


_4lS_ 


a  e 


^= 


1 


Z5Z&&Z 


I*5£ 


The  Guitar  may  be  played  m  all  keys,  but,  like  all  other 
instruments,  it  has  some  keys  more  favorable  to  it  than  others. 
Those  which  are  most  suitable,  are  C,  major ;  G,  major ;  D, 
major  and  minor  ;  A,  major  and  minor ;  E,  major  and  minor : 
and  F,  major.  The  other  keys  are  difficult,  because  they  re- 
quire too  often,  the  use  of  the  Barren  I  have  therefore  placed 
in  the  first  part  of  this  work,  the  Gamuts,  Cadences  and  Exer- 
cises only  in  those  keys  most  in  use. 

As  I  think  it  important,  however,  to  be  acquainted  with  ail 
the  keys,  and  that  they  should  be  practiced,  I  have  placed  ip 
the  second  part  of  this  method  all  that  I  have  thought  necessary 
!oi  this  purpose. 


La  Guitare  peut  jouer  dans  tons  les  tons,  mais  comme  torn 
les  instruments,  elle  a  ses  tons  favoris.  Ceux  qui  ltd  convien- 
nent  le  mieux,  sont :  Ut  majeur,  Sol  majeur,  Re  majeur  e. 
mineur,  La  majeur  et  mineur,  Mi  majeur  et  mineur,  et  Fa  na- 
jenr, 

Les  autres  sont  difficiles  parcequ'ils  necessitent  l'empioi  trop 
fiequent  du  Barre ;  aussi  je  n'ai  note  dans  la  Ire  partie  de  ce 
ouvrage,  que  les  Gammes,  Cadences,  Exercices  et  morceaui 
progressifs  dans  les  tons  les  plus  usites 

Cependant  comme  je  pense  qu'il  est  important  de  spnnaitre 
tous  les  tons  et  de  s'y  exeicer,  j'ai  place  dans  la  2me  partie  d« 
cette  Methode  tout  ce  que  j'ai  cru  necessaire  pour  arriver  a  c« 
'^sultat. 


H2 


CABCASSI'S     INSTRUCTIONS     FOR     THE     SLITAK. 


Gamuts,  Cadences,  Exercises  and  Preludes. 

To  facilitate  the  execution  of  the  Gamuts,  it  is  necessary 
i  sat  the  fingers  of  the  left  hand  should  he  held  sufficiently  sep- 
f;ated,  and  so  placed,  that  they  may  he  put  on,  and  taken  off 
tie  strings,  without  moving  the  hand. 

A  finger  which  is  placed  on  a  note,  should  not  be  moved  but 
to  finger  the  note  following,  unless  this  note  should  be  an  open 
string. 

In  Gamuts  ascending,  when  passing  from  one  note  to  another, 
the  finger  must  not  be  raised  too  quickly  from  the  string,  lest  it 
vibrate  if  left  open  too  soon. 

In  the  following  Preludes  and  Little  Pieces,  care  must  be 
aken  to  sustain  the  notes,  as  well  in  the  Bass,  as  in  the  other 
parts ;  this  caution  is  necessary,  in  order  to  obtain  a  full  and 
harmonious  style. 


Gammes,  Cadences,  Exercises  ct  Preludes. 

Pour  faciliter  l'execution  des  Gammes,  il  faut  que  les  doigu 
de  la  mam  gauche  se  tiennent  assez  ecartes,  et  places  de  maniere 
a  pouvorr  les  poser  et  les  lever  sur  les  cordes,  sans  deranger  h 
main. 

II  ne  faut  jamais  lever  ledoigt  place  sur  nne  note,  qu'en  doig- 
tant  la  note  suivante,  a.  moins  que  cette  note  ne  se  fasse  a  rie. 

Dans  les  gammes  montantes,  .'orsqu'on  passe  d'une  corde  i 
une  autre,  il  ne  faut  pas  retirer  tmp  vivement  le  doigt  de  la  corde 
que  1'on  quitte,  afin  d'eviter  la  vifcrat^n  de  cette  corde  a  vide 

Dans  les  Preludes  et  les  peats  morceaux  suivants  on  aura 
soin  de  bien  observer  la  tenue  des  iotes,  tant  a  la  basse  qu'aia 
autres  parties ;  cette  condition  est  i.  «essaire  pour  obtenir  un  jeu 
plein  et  harmonieux. 


Gamut. 


Cadence. 


Key  of  C  Major. 

3  2  3  2 


1  3 


En  Ton  d'Ut  Majenr 


^^^PPE 


-K- 


rtiSi 


faSE 


^ 


^ 


:•      x  w 


x 


-i&- 


^m 


ii 


SE 


^ 


a-p- 


1 


Exercise. 


*=r=&^ 


fi^ 


lps^i|i^^i 


A 


r    r 


M 


Prelude. 


£^=^3 


/  ■*■ 


r      r 


^         g 


r=w 


:§E 


r 


31 


continue. 


f=T=f=F 


'OT=^r^3E|2jf 


CABCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIOS    FOE    THE     GUITAR. 


£3 


sa^^^^^^^P^ 


-* — -» 


J—J 


r i 


i— £E 


PP^ 


r^)..   /  JJ_^ 


I  i 


5^^E^E3^EE« 


SHI 


Waltz. 


g^ ^ 


!?F=^ 


^m 


-*. — •, 


i — -± 


'  /* 


t 


-• — # 


--^—       — 


*       /: 


^IgMPl 


r 


m/ 


-tp 


*=* 


I 


3t=lt 


-• 0- 


±=£ 


i^ 


^^ 


2i^=3t 


=^S=* 


;s^ME=feSg 


d^ 


& 


l^fcip 


Tpgn^ 


I 


Mlcsrett*.  zE-2^ 
ft  Slhfc 


\     J 


=2=* 


^S 


3 •■ 


^^^^ 


a 


^ 


s 


fft  • 


4—3: 


g-        — j- 


*=*= 


s 


r 


^^^3 


3z=^=i^ 


£    " 


i     i       i 
1     i   ■•*■■ 


..     r.     d — •- 


tT~r 


^z 


±=t=± 


p 


mm 


-§ 


^mm 


r 


i     ^ 


m= 


^=#=J: 


3^ 


w^ 


IT 


3+2 


i\ 


24 


Gamut      #S 


CABCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR 


Key  of  C  Major. 


Eh  Ton  de  Sol  Majeur. 


WT& 


mm 


^^ 


is 


Cadence.   3ft 


^L«j_ 


3^ 


T 


ftS- 


■  4g3. 


-3sL 


* 


3^ 


^ 


^ 


»p- 


Kiercise.  3:t 


^fff^p! 


^ 


S^ 


3*- 


m 


ifd: 


3~lf 


Ml 


US 


"*F 


Pi 


r#— 


I3_l 


:s^=s= 


• — #- 


-L-^ _ lJ 


sj- 


W 


Wm 


- '? 


Andantino.    fe^F — ; 


— — _ ~  ! 


^ 


=£3 


i 


ri 


x  — — -i —  etj — I — 3  eza— .±rd 


=E=^  r/^__T      '"      'J__r     f     F__/-  >^F_y^ 


?— r  7 


OABOASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    j?OK    THE    GUITAK 


*i.i 


m 


-f       f 


^bS^ 


^=r^ 


j^ 


=* 


•  •» 


W£ 


.-nrrnrg^B 


Waltz. 


J=J=^ 


-* •- 


/y      *r    f     j 


ssr 


J=T 


-»     «* 


KW 


X  X 


1 


it±i5 


&==£ 


^=^r- 


^m 


3=3 


—    mfl       r I* 


J    *    J    *~g: 


5W       "*/ 


3^ 


/-• 


^=F 


^3= 


^S 


• *■ 


J-iJ      I      J 


-0 m- 


2 


Jlj         ^ 


i       d 


obsgr* 


f-r 


m 


r    /'     ^j1    r    -£__r    y 

X  X 


Fin.  • 


T5 

X 


s^ 


naF 


—  P  f         f-' 

*r      r       x 


Szrat 


gj^fei^r^^f^g 


_« l-3(JE= f- 

"X  X 


&    1  aJ 


~r 


o.  c.     •$' 


gs^m 


r7 


7^ 


(jallap. 


g=^T^2 


*t 


-Hg— #- 


=■£^5^ 


+-*- 


j*=m 


••— t_ 


r 


^^^^^^^^^^^M: 


^==^— ^ 


J— ^— «~; 


r 


7^i#-       " 


f      '      T*       "T      '      f     '     K 


fe 


■£=E 


^  ■N«rTr^ 


-*— *- 


Fiu.  ^ *"^" 

-NT «! 


H 


X 


T 


T 


y   -p- 

X 


3 


rH*- 


3^P=R 


it 


-I— I  D.  C.     IP 


.*] 


f 


■p- 


V 


36 


CAECASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOE    THE    GUITAK 


Key  of  D  Major, 

To  facilitate  the  fingering  in  the  Gamut  of  D  Major,  it  is 
jecessarv  to  advance  the  left  hand  to  the  second  fret. 


En  Ton  de  Re  Majcur. 

Pour  faciliter  le  doigte  dans  la  Camme  du  .or.  ce  Re  n.ajen 
il  faut  avancer  la  main  gauche  a  la  deuxieme  toac  le. 


to — ra~»~*     ~~i        I    ' '    r 


3       1 


2       1 


:fc* 


r  •  i     i     r 


••      •    •• 


Cadence.  iJtift 


P*& 


Jr 


-3-s{ 


•••«•• 


-*_«=L 


1 — r  1~r *~E  J~! — ! — i — r — i — I — i — r 

x  •■  "»"  :a:  Z2  zx  zt  :a: 


"-ST* 


I 


"■    Ij.  "•" 


— S-<Sr 


j:is_ 


3    S 


r 


-Q-S>'r 


1 


r 


ikercise.  g=8g"  jjEEHErTEiJEE 


2    8 


1    2 


••        •        •• 


i ~*~» — f  — r~ — i — r~i — r —     r  i — »— ; 


^BS- 


rt 


••     •     •• 


m —    r  j    a  *  -j  -g    rfj — i — i — i — i — i  ~>'~r~  i~j^rTn — i — ra  azrnzrz__?iis!_srinn_-TEz35d_.^:: tf 

"^_f+^^fl^^±-*zgi-c^a=q^4J^gjzJ3^-aH-j _?L^_a_l^        _± tf 

X        «X  -*-»-,'-    :J:-J-»-m         :     .   x      X X | 


Prelude. 


13  2 

I      I      I 


1    2 


F 


p^^=====       BSHTTn  n^^5^      m-44+fl 


i-s=ddHW-*-H- 


tt 


t-3 


i—r 


i    i    i    i 


3H    CS 


'^33E?3: 


3Z3: 


33: 


is    c~i    i 


:»i3: 


i '  i    i   pi 
—    r1: 
I  _j I 


i    I    I    I J    i    I    j     I    l    i    I J    i    i    j    .       j         .'J     j     [     I     I     I         j  J     I     I      ._ 


r^zi  2      4  j 

i  r 


r 


r 


12    14 


I I l_ 


azx^ 


HH- 


JH* l I L 


,  i    r* — i ; 


fe 


-r-r 


?§ 


t— r 


33=P 


PI 


!  ^EfS 


rn— ha— f"*rT 


T 


im 


-f9 


1    2 


1»- 


I  I 

When  two  notes  which  are  to  be  played  on  the  same  string 
neet,  the  upper  note  must  be  taken  as  usual,  and  the  lower  one 
m  the  next  string. 

The   D    on  the  second   string,  the   B    on    the 
hird  string  on  the  fourth  fret. 


— t- 

r 


1    2 


13  2 


The  O  on  th )  '  st  string,  the  E  on  the  2d  string 


«  the  <hh  fr;t. 


m 


mm 


Lorsqu'on  trouve  deux  notes  ensemble  qui  toutes  deax  sa 
doigtent  sur  la  meme  corde,  on  fait  la  plus  haute  a  sa  place  ordi- 
naire, et  la  plus  basse  on  la  doigte  sur  la  corde  suivante. 

On  fait  le  Re  sur  la  2me  corde,  et  le  Si  sur  la 

3me  corde  a  la  4me  case. 


I 


On  fait  le  Sol  sur  la  chanterelle,  et  le  Mi  anr  la 
2me  corde  a  la  5me  case. 


vlARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS     FOR    THE    GUITAR. 


37 


8 


IX 

-03 


wgjr 


SSB 


i# 


as 


£* 


S3' 


01^ 


W-* — it- a* — r 


be 


• — , — • 


S^gj 


r- 


~>       Ti 


s'H: 


TSZl-'OI 


r- 


»r »i — — »"• *•  r  —       —  p  i  r 


>_ 


•  •         •• 


-• — *- 


j^. 


-e-v — J— — nr~zzrzrzzz^zz\^- ^_ 

r ' — — F~^^        e*      - 


f- 


r 


r 


f- 


p 


r 


^ 


1 


J"      I         fr-,  |_J^-J fc^ 1-S.^-tf-jL 


f- 


r 


-r- 


"&! 


^p^=itisii§l 


7^5 


«»/ 


3"*"» 


l~S~« 


3fcl 


i=^=S 


~* — a~ 


-# — # 


thS". 


i 


P^ •==-x-gr---r_  __t___z_± t^r  _=t^_-=^-=rq a 

51.      5:.  I  -»■■      •♦■■  |W> 

f^^EgE^EfeE^^p|g| 

ff  .—4^- —J- — L?-^^ — yg-s       "  «  . 


D.C.  S 


1     —»"lrf 


*$s 


CARCASSI'S    INPTBUCTlONfl    1  u  li    THi,    GUXTAK 
Key  of  A  Major.  2pos;  Koi Ton  d«  La  Majear. 

Gamut   jpi- ,-— ^ir -_*_  >-  -F-F~ f— i»-» =, =, i . 

?■ ;  rT  •  •  *     r^7^r^a 


Cadence.  ~&i^_- 


:_: ~sr 


g    ^ Small!  barrer.  I  j 

— sr t-jS^ — ?~ C——^^ :— 

'  Petit  barrS.  ~      .  ^3~ 


1 


I  '  Petit  barrS.  -S- 

fixercise.  ^pa--^ -^aazzi i  _jij— i^-"!^  —  t — i    i    w — l*^H-~ I— ^ i 1 5      i  « 

^ X .'  XX  ••••••        u     •    n     • 

i ;:..?5^    r    r     r 


Pelade.  ^^~S^^r^^^^~I~0=^^-^^^^S-^-C==r^'n    rpTT^ 
♦.  i.  "?•  ^T  ^a -^ =1 

1  t  -+  r^  ff,*T ,*• r   -- — -*- —ft 

?'  '        ' 


-»-■  -»-•  "II  '  ,  -+  —  — i 

r"  r-  r-  r"  i"" 

Segl4^i.  V  i  rrTru-u.i.1  ij^-HSg^ 


—  -.-  *1 


—  J  Z± 

r-  ?-•  ?■ 


i r 

m  I '  g  i  i  r 


"f"1 


^. 


Ml 


l 


r:- 


_____  r 

____=££_U=^fc^^  Fto. 

?•     ?•      r     T~    ^     'f.  '  *    ~*~ 


OARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    'itfE    GUITAR. 


•29 


♦•  •• 


E.C,  S 


March. 


x 


f 


"25" 


=3= 
f 


^^^^^^g^^^fej 


~r~f  #~r 


"» — r 


r 


-p-      — - 


I 


r#n« 


H fc 


azzazzzazzazzz±z7|:l:zzSz:g^~^ I 

idr-*-        zz  "czzzzz  zz  *i « .zz  »i    ~ 

r  F  i-L-T  u-u-'  NT 


r 


zLgzjzgzjZ- 3-fzj: .._ j 


-#— »j-«— * — i- 

-0— m—  0— m— m 


— ,  & 


Fin. 


La 
AHegrctto.^&  f  =*-f- 


P" _P 


P-  ZZE  -P-  -#- 


~2» 

_  C 


^-^fip-*-^-^— -1- 


F  u 

iL8_:fe_» ^+z§^ g p£zzrzi||Ezizjzl — 1— p— n-#=|--*-^*^S=j-ggz=gE»r: 

_:  i  .0-  f     p-0-         -«_-#-       ^  


ft •- — 0- 


% 


rA 


*•      •■• 


=£ 


fizz^zlz 


3EZ 


=fe£ 


:zzz* 


i-T— m — m 1  - 


-m- 

-0- 


M 


f-f 


'&-■•- 


r_f 


Hjzzzgziz^zz gzti5=:g-g-j:|zg=:— q_^t_^— -^g*__j=  „8_^^— ^1 ^z^zz--zizz:zz»zzizj-zh 


#-<r 


tJ" 


m/- 


F 


jZJzzzzzzzzzxzzzziz^zi-- 


F 


F 


i  J     i  I     Mil       px.         I     I  J 


-Zfrzz^zqzri- 


5p£p3*rg 


#-*- 


F 


-(©- 


F 


F 


EEE^gpEp£i*=S: 


"zH 


-ri- 


w — I 


its; 


t»: 


--)—«■— 


3-T 


Pf^ 


=tL 


=S--: 


=r^=t 


zq — 1— »' 
_z:iz:* 


-T5: 


M 


m$ 


r>p-(Sh 


iO 


CARCASSl'S     INSTRUCTIONS     FOR     THE     GUITAR. 

Key  of  E  Major.  En  Ton  dc  Mi  Majcur. 


Gamnl.  %*g* 


2       4  2       4       1       2      4       1       a,        ,      2     4 


wm- 


4       12      4       12        ,      2     4  2      g    m 

-i     ■     F      J  a   •   r  '     i  -1 — ! — 


*BJ  j,   I   igj 


^m 


ii 


Cadence  J^i-ff 


4 


gE r£ 


-iS- 


3Bt 


^ 


HI 


r 


SjST- 


W 


^^^^^^gi^^ 


^s^i^l^i^^pi^ 


^^l 


Yrelnde.  5^A 


SE 


S 


B 


3=£ 


ifei^fe^i^ 


r 


^eiei 


i#s 


— al-aj-al #*-•-• — j 


-#nr-#« 


rqjfe|«ii»*i 


=£#*-*-# 


« 


gg-gg: 


^  #©• 


r 


T 


4ndantino.^-S-55— «t=  — ^— f— 5- 


»/y      FV 


3= 


s 


:»=£ 


•  •         • 


X        •        X 


JS=» 


e=? 


•      •  • 


H — i — 4— -^-^-4 


X        •         X 


3:fc*5=^ 


7  i  i^ili^Mili^^i^ll^^^^^ 


±3=3=& 


■5fe=^ibrfg 


— f — *=irz*4=: 


F 


/r 


*  *; 


CAROASSI'S     INSTRUCTIONS     FOR    THE    GUITAR. 


31 


IT?      gr  T      t  t  1.1 ' 


30        40-  0-    -0-         I 


SF 


^  -p-  -pr 


^m^r^ 


£#-*3Eftrf-— |— f- 


M 


if       5  p  7   y 


*aL 


J^^^h*-^^  ■*«rni 


r~Tf — r^-^TM 


0-0-^-0-0- 


r  ~~r- 


-0 — • « — 0- 


&&  *0     kg  ;      -J  -    "J"  •»  • ^_      is  _,    __  f-r*.     n~i  J~t~ 1    J~T2  -N . . 


T=r — ^37?  iTr 


TO/' 


afc 


«=£ 


jqR=±^^^^^ 


T*7"  "P7 


SV-TH- 


T7 


r   pr  T 


^    Fin.  I"*, 


r  u  r  r  rrt" 


j     JVf? 


^r"? 


IT 


SEffi 


gj^pf 


&s 


a^i 


:dt         7  7 


4      '^      7  5 


7  ^         f" > 

1^  I        V 


wait,  ^igiQlf^hbLj-l-J- 


3E 


ais 


J— *  *- 


*t 


-* — — — •- 


-g^-jaj- 


a^azTTrTjg^i 


^ 


7" 


I'll 

i  y  '     i     i       w 

J-lj.    I  _       I — C=t3fc 


s=e 


& 


fejgjlliEEEigla 


zsfct 


*t 


a^rtzz *— *         * 


1*         g 


If#r 


r#-*j-a-»    I  *    |x* 


^=T"3    F5  _T 


^^b 


gf^^g 


-0-1—0- 


E:=g=g= 


■^-# — » — — #■ 


^f    r 


i    '  =  =  =  =   t      f    *    f 
T  T  t  r 


f 


"    w 


£  4#3i  -•       •     40-1  ••  •  ^™^™1^^"H  , 

5r  /*]  |j^ff»y  ^Tf=6rj£f^^fef^~^~j^ 


^t^ 


*t)( 


£di 


D.  C.       $ 


^Ptl 


■f- 


•'- 


mf         — . 


7" 


32 


CARCASSI'S     INSTRUCTIONS     FOR     THE     GUITAR 


Key  of  F  Major. 

1*  13  2       3  23,      13 


En  Ton  de  Fa  Majcnr. 


£M 


3=F 


<i  a  in  lit,   JLtH 


^=P= 


II 


3f3^ 


=3=*- 7=* 


=t 


e#ppii 


^m 


Cadence 


-J, 


Sci. 


^e- 


-*Sf- 


rret 


:a& 


ges: 


-J- 


T^ 


*S>- 


3g 


1 


IKerfise. 


^e- 


ffp^333 


^-W-. 


*-» 


3b£ 


:?-*— * 


S^^S 


x 


i^f^^hJ^pJF 


fc^ 


r 


j- 


3F 


a 


Prelnde. 


.—  ■■,— 


^^m^m^m^im&im^^wmi 


*t3- a.  — ty 

I2  i 


/   ^3     2     1     1  , 


*»". 


J_*_ 


i^Ei!^ 


F3       '..  f 


a 


=s=?=i 


)  11.11 


gaoj.g 


a 


C3^        "*-f-*-r ■-tt-^-t-* 0 


r==p 


»i^j-*-*-t 


»-3tf± 


^^ 


r       r 


13 


Waltz,  j^-b^     ••  — jjj: 


& 


:<    iM 


S«=t#F= 


-3E 


33^3E 


dSft 


S^ 


8-#-v- 


7  - 


lA-r^^ 


a 


aa^^^g^^^^^^^^^^^^^l 


^' 


r 


^ 


ifediiSI 


5H 


• *■ 


-# *n # 


*=6« 


t^ 


IT 


f 


r     7 


p 


=*=^ 


3^ 


^^ 


±s 


B 


a 


I 


5e 


* 


CAKCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS     FOE    THE    GUITAR 


33 


at 


55-^-t 


2*1 


-ii      T..        Sh 


s 


3t=E±=2z 


*$-—-■ — Yfet 


IE 


f    r 


-r' 


Narch.      /£-kC     "" 


^EgE 


H m , "(-. 


^     ^.  g  iq^-s- 


S 


bi==f 


n/J     T 


f     r     -;  "?    r  ■    ■  T     r     i,  j    t 


1"=^ 


X 


E£ 


^ 


fli 


^       I        I 


33 


IeeS 


iib 


352 


it 


■f-1^- 


r^i 


r  i    L^r   ? 


:N-z 


3t=f 


I 


^^        j    ^ 


I  I  I 


#£E 


i 


&—£ 


m 


m^ 


jr^       •*** 


*    ^  «:    ^ 


5^ 


=*=3 


iS 


■l^- l^""l 


^^^^^ 


S£ 


:*   *  ^ 


I         I  I  Fin 


3E* 


II 


*— g 


"^*- 


b# 


^ 


f=^ 


^    *mf 


T    x    •    7     v 


X       1/ 


r     ^^ 


1/ 


4Uegrctto.  fek± 


2t3!3s3=*=*=* 


!=?-^ 


^— - 


^^jg 


pi 


mfi 


3E* 


H'0'ltfWi 


rk— 


BeSbiBIe 


3(C 


IB 


=r=t=? 


3^2 


I — r 


5^^? 


*^=^ 


f-r 


st 


-*— *- 


§§ 


3t±tr* 


EEffl 


^ 


m/. 


^^^™^^™"^  !  Fin.  •     •     • •        •  •  "  •  ^^^■"^■^"■^™  P^™"^"^"~n 


X       X        X        X 


1SS 


i^-gfi-iW J-T^*^?^"-^ 


^1 


a-#- 


g^£ 


X 


7/= 


*7 


7       5 5 x™?-    g     7     T     > 


EE3E 


-.»-    r 


*        xxxxy  rx      -*-  -*-  ■      ™ 


31 


CARCASSI'S    INSTEUOTIONS    FOB    THE    GUITAR 


Key  of  A  Minor. 


En  Ton  de  La  Mineiir, 


Curat, 


1        3 


W 


-*-    -#- 


4     * 


■$*- 


=^ES3^iMi3EM 


£3 


2  3       2 


mmmmi 


Cadence. 


ji^E 


:3S 


is; 


-2S- 


;*#£?- 


:st 


IB 


r 


Exercise. 


rfi 


3= 


-#— * 


-## 


i=^^^S 


-I L 


5E^5 


-gg- 


S 


^«- 


x  :x 


^ 


Prelude. 


/ 


-* — l— » 


i/    « 


= :  .izrt  -.®-  ^4- 1 


¥ 


mm^mmmmmmm. 


I.dante.  E^|^^^ 


y     PI 


^ 


FT=?S3=eee£ 


^ 


▼  + 


PH«ff 


mf 


^=1 


*  T   • 


^^^^^^^jP^ig^^^E 


CAKCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS     FOR    THE    GUITAR 


3d 


3=s 


j~    0      #4 


JEg&SEfe' 


^^ 


d       • ^ 


Si 


T" 


f" 


i=it 


m 


-• — * 


* — * — *- 


m 


r 


m 


^ 


?=#^ 


■**- 


3= 


f 


r 


f 


f~     r^io,.  r       r      r 


5= 


I 


pp 


-p- 


^ 


J — J- 


^g^q-r-^ 


Waltz. 


^— S- 


»«/ 


continue. 


a 


i         i 
i        i 

afc=afc 


^EgE 


J — J- 


mt 


A,l 


— 3< 


T- 


mm 


/s 


ii 


=• 


r 


..»_!     ■. 


y 


£  i    T 


ta 


ii=3 


s 


-*       s 


z$Sz 


Tmf-- 


f5" 


gS^I 


^Ifi 


-*=£ 


i       ^^ 


3=£ 


^**J-J- 


7" 


7^ 


r   o—      —       7     — 


fe* 


MM= 


£ 


H 


s=gj 


a_f« ^_ 


^:      ^:        7 


iLJr       "C_r 


«A_I 


/>: 


fc*- 


=^E 


i   i    i    i 


-tO 


g=^-T-j- 


3n 


^5=5 


3i 


-»        g~ 


H 


■f-    r 


7      3:  •>  ; 


36 

Gamut.    :3± 


He;  of  E  Minor. 

2      3  2       4       12      4 


OAKCASSI'S     INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAfi. 

En  ton  de  Mi  Minenr. 


m-J- 


,  i  i  i-H-^^vrr^ —  — : 


i 


Tadence.  dfcft 


e — g 


-»&- 


3^ 


^#^~ 


^rst 


4 


ir 


i-p-  r= 

75" 


II 


Exercise.  It*: 


l=^f  jj^^fif 


^S^=*^^^^*i^^ 


^^— ^ 


m 


"P"       w 


Prelude.  3£i 


zifc 


r»: 


/: 


i—i 


^zE 


r 


*q 


B^EES 


r 


H#»- 


~JtIz±=*z 


m — -H#- 


• #■ 


s 


at 


-» *■ 


***- 


r 


I  |    •  |  i      gr.  Barre.     — £  i 


Ulcgrctto.2u_fc=jiE 


— N     I  IV- 


w— ^ 


jV-j-a»- 


E**E-i 


£ 


F^ 


Tfty 


*t 


£ 


«=*t 


T 


g 


^^fe^^S^^f^^ 


3± 


m 


-&* 


r^um 


"■/"  '  J~7    f 


m 


r  -*-^-  r  y-  -  -r 


«4 


4j 


H»- 


^^ig^f^=feE^^^^|^ 


r 


/Tp-r- 


cfc* 


i^feE^Eg 


:=E^ 


fUT 

^-^S: 


#=^ 


S 


* — 

~w 


WW 


2E 


^= 


*_jL 


r r 

FJ» F 

-^1*        ■% 


fTfT 


^^H 


"rL_:5' 


bannt. 


JARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR. 
Key  •(  D  Minor.  j  En  Ton  dc  Re  Minear. 

1 


* •       '       "       '       ~-       •       -*^  #J.  tjjj-  =£  -*-  S 


37 


i 


fadenee. 


Exercise. 


B^: 


3gtp= 


^st 


•\  t'fjg^ 


32fc 


^ ^ 


ZSSfc 


1 


2ST 

i 


1^ 


^  ^  3  *[*"#* 


^TT*-- 


^=i=*= 


g£!^EJ^ 


'5P=bi 


S 


E3 


& 


Prelude. 


i^e: 


^F3— H 

* ~ ;.    *—    -T# 


7T 


BiJ^^d! 


■p- 


^^= 


«* 


^=*£ 


sfet 


It 


4*? 


^^ 


-o- 


-Gt- 


-&- 


~V 


wa.t,  |ig^:s^^£g^:-  ~-^t "  ■■ 


i-fet* 


m/7 

a? 


^^^^"^f^i 


? 


=  /#- 


-#» 


-tJ— _      *      _   + 


x        -.*• 


:r*= 


jP^JBpB^^g^ 


3=P^ 


— -J— * — j— *. 


i3^2- 


>        4     Fin.  1  p 


/F"  Lg^ — — i-^t— ^ — — V4 — 


;■■        j- 


p^*^*— ggf»3 


^3Efa 


■      -ii     — 
i  i  i  i  I    j  j  i 


»t  — d — d — fc  — -j * 


— * — * — •-  ■-'— W-  — g — i nE : 


rr^t- 


:i:  r   r 


pfi^»  *    — r-  r      i      -*  E  — i — i — £  — i — i — ^-  — * — * — at :     *      4  ZjM±=t. 

r  T- ^T         ZA=- — V —       =F r 


a 


HH 


CARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOK    THE    GUITAR. 


Guitar  .nisic  aimost  always  requires  several  parts,  which 
ncreases  .  te  difficulty  01  execution,  unless  the  pupil  has  already 
acquired  the  habit  of  moving  each  finger  of  the  left  hand, 
separately  and  independently.  The  following  22  exercises  are 
v?ry  useful  in  obtaining  this  object.  Each  of  them  should  be 
t-p«ated  five  or  six  times. 

Whilst  the  pupil  is  practising  these  exercises,  he  may  at  the 
«ame  time  apply  himself  to  the  first  twelve  little  pieces  of  the 
bird  part,  and  afterwards  to  the  exercises  of  the  second  part. 


Continue  with  the  same  6nt;ers  of  the  ri»ht  hand. 

. 5~ 


\9.    I. 


No.  2. 


stJ- 


£ 


l=m 


±=t- 


La  musique  de  Guitare  exige  presque  toujours  p1us«su.i 
parties,  qui  presenters  des  difficulty  d'execution,  lorsqu'on  n'a  pa» 
acquis  a  l'avance,  1'habitude  de  diriger  chaque  doigt  de  la  irair 
gauche,  par  tine  impulsion,  independante  des  autres  doigts. 

Les  22  exercices  suivans  sont  tres  convenables  pour  arrivir  i 
ce  but.  Chacun  de  ces  exercices  doit  etre  repete  cinq  ou  su 
fois  de  suite.  L'eleve  pourra,  tout  en  travaillant  ces  exercices, 
entreprendre  d'etudier  les  douze  premiers  petits  irorceaux  df 
la  troisieme  partie  ;  et  pourra  suivre  ensuite  les  exercices  de  ia 
seconde  partie. 

Suivez  avec  les  memes  doigts  de  la  main  droite. 


7^n_ 


feL 


7 


— — J    ~Ttm 


-* 


ri 


153- 


3 


mm\ 


mm 


No.  3.  &e 


No.  4.  &e 


U.  5 


No. 


No.  7. 


No   8. 


— •        c — _i i j 

li^lKfaseH 


3p"  -pr  I-- 

x  -&■  ~P~  —  cs<- 


».  ioHH^^H 


X 


CARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    <*UITAR. 


*o.  2f23trfEElE3E3E3f 


40 


oARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOB    THE    GUITA*. 


SECOND    PART. 


SECONDE  PARTIE. 


Of  the  Slur. 


Two  or  more  Notes  pVj>yed  successively,  of  which  only  the 
first  is  made  to  vibrate  by  (he  right  hand,  and  the  others  by  the 
mere  pressure  of  the  fing'  rs  of  the  left  hand,  are  called  slurred 
notes. 

Slurs  are  performed  both  in  rising  and  in  descending.  To  ex- 
ecute slurs  of  two  note?,  in  rising  the  lower  note  is  to  be  played, 
and  the  finger  of  the  left  hand  descends  like  a  hammer  and 
with  a  good  deal  of  fo/ce  upon  the  higher  note,  which  must 
sound  from  the  mere  impulse  of  this  finger. 

In  descending,  the  higher  note  is  played,  and  drawing  the 
finger  which  pressed  it,  a  little  to  one  side,  so  as  to  touch  the 
string  a  little,  the  lower  note  is  made  to  sound.  If  the  latter 
note  is  not  on  an  open  string,  it  must  be  prepared  before  the 
higher  note  is  made  to  vibrate. 

The  nix  is  indicated  by  this  sign  ,. ^    placed   over  the 

acres  i"/j;.ch  are  to  be  slurred. 


&/.UES  OF  TWO  NOTES  RISINtt  AND  DESCENDING. 


Play  the  E  and  place  the  first  finger  on  F. 
Pioce  lo  Mi  et  appuyez  le  ler  dotgt  sur  le  Fa. 


Des  notes  coulees  et  liees. 


On  appelle  notes  coulees  deux  ou  plusieurs  notes  feites  sue 
cessivement,  dont  la  premiere  seulement  est  mise  en  vibratiot 
par  la  main  droite,  et  Ies  autres  par  la  settle  pression  des  doigts 
de  la  main  gauche. 

Les  coules  se  font  en  montant  et  en  descendant.  Pour  exe- 
cuter  des  coules  de  deux  notes  en  montant,  on  pince  la  note 
grave,  et  on  laisse  tomber  le  doigt  de  la  main  gauche,  en  forme 
de  marteau,  et  avec  assez  de  force,  sur  la  note  aigfie,  qui  doit 
resonner  par  la  seule  impulsion  de  ce  doigt. 

En  descendant  on  pince  la  note  aigae,  et  en  retirant  le  doiet 
qui  la  comprimait,  un  peu  de  cote,  de  maniere  a  pincer  un  peu 
la  corde,  on  fait  resonner  la  note  grave.  Si  cette  note  ne  se  fai. 
pas  a  vide,  il  faut  qu'elle  soit  preparee  avant  que  la  note  aigi* 
soit  mise  en  vibration. 

Le  coule  est  indique  par  ce  signe  „ ^   place  sur  bs  note* 

qu'on  doit  couler. 


COULES  DE  DEUX  NOTES  EN  MONTANT  ET  EN 
DESCENDANT. 


wr^^y 


Play  the  F  and  draw  back  the  finger  to  sound  the  E. 
Pincez  le  Fa  et  retirez  le  doigt  pour  faire  entendre  le  Mi. 


^51 


=3F 


Play  the  B  and  place  the  3d  finger  on  C. 
Pincez  le  Si  et  appuyez  le  3e  doigt  sur  l'Ut. 


rr^ 


Play  the  G  and  draw  back  the  finger  to  sound  the  F. 
Pincez  le  Sol  et  retirez  le  doigt  pour  faire  entendre  le  Fa 


HS 


==R 


m 


m 


Ther«-  are  also  slurs  of  two  notes,  in  descending,  on  two  dif- 
ferent strings,  which  are  called  "  Vibration  Slurs."  To  perform 
ih*<m,  play  the  higher  note,  which  in  this  case  is  almost  always 
open,  then  str  ke  hard  With  the  finger  of  the  left  hand  the  note 
.vhich  is  to  br  slurrel,  and  which  will  be  sounded  by  the  mere 
impulse  of  the  finger 


—  "^jr     -°- 

On  fait  aussi  des  coules  do  deux  notes,  en  descendant,  sui  ' 
deux  cordes  differentes,  qu'on  appelle  coules  par  vibration 
Pour  Ies  executer  on  pince  la  note  aigue,  qui  dans  ce  cas,  est 
presque  toujours  a  vide,  puis  l'on  frappe  fortement  at  ec  le  doigt 
de  la  main  gnuehe  la  note  devant  etre  coulee,  et  qui  tesonnera 
par  la  seule  impulsion  de  cc  doigt. 


CARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR 


in  rising  the  effect  of  the  slur  is  also  produced  by  sliding  the 
ihumb  of  the  right  hand  from  one  string  to  the  other ;  in  this 
rase  the  first  note  must  be  struck  rather  hard  and  the  thumb 
lide  with  de'icacy  over  the  next  string. 


41 

En  montant  on  produit  aussi  l'effet  du  coule  en  glissauit  le 
pouce  de  la  main  droite  d'une  corde  a  l'autre  ;  dans  ce  cas  i 
faut  attaquer  la  premiere  note  un  pen  fort  et  glisser  le  pcuw 
avec  delicatesse  sur  la  corde  voisin« 


Play  the  E  and  strike  the  3d  finger  on  D. 
Pincez  le  Mi  et  frappez  le  3e  doigt  aur  le  Re. 


same. 


mmm 


■&—•- 


Vibration. 


1 


i 


Slide  the  thumb. 
Gliasez  le  pouce. 


same. 


lams.       VTorotioa.     aame. 


~wr  ■*■  ^s 


± 


±1: 


r 


IB 


mf  _y  s  ^r}-  9^y     ~" '  s"~     -"'  ^ 


a — I     ;     P — i t 1 rr*-*-^        / I       I     l_  i» ; 


r-r^ r— - 


T*TJ* 


3 


:^^: 


fcfc 


^SiEi: 


-      ^=s^EI= 


S"p" 


PR 


Wegretto.lF^HJ^r^ 

non  troppo.Rft -©■ 


:S^lSi?Hliiii=^i^Sp 


■»• 


Bfeg^feBE^^jfegl^ 


=1 


attej- 


"*~i — r 


-»"• 


=7        ^        r-         j.  f. 

iiSljlll^lllillll&il 

I I n* — c y it—  o ■ 


Tll'TI 


ifHf^ 


_& 


T-I^T- 


^jzsrji».^^f£S=S=S 


±EE 


161 


f- 


-r. 


2  J~3='     -2-3     r 


4<£ 


CARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS     FOR    THE    GUITAR. 


Slurs  of  three  or  lour  notes  are  made  in  the  same  manner  as  Les  coules  de  trois  ou  quatre  notes  se  font  par  le  meme  more* 

-ose  of  two  notes,  by  setting  the  first  note  in  vibration  with  que  ceux  de  deux  notes,  en  mettant  en   vibration  la  premier, 

the  right  hand,  and  laying  on  or  withdrawing,  according  as  the  note  avec  la  main  droite,  et  en  appuyant,  ou  en  retirant  succes- 

suns  ascending  or  descending,  as  many  fiugers  of  the  left  sivement,  selon  que  le  coule  est  ascendant  ou  descendant  autanl 


rand  as  there  are  notes  to  be  slurped. 


Slurs  of  Three  Notes. 

Shar^  the  Mi,  and  then  place  successively  the  first  finger  upon  the  Fa,  and 
!ke  «Mrd  k.  ton  the  Sol. 


de  doigts  de  la  main  gauche  qu'il  y  a  de  notes  a  couler.  Er 
descendant  il  faut  toujours  preparer  les  notes  qu'on  doit  coiilei 
excepte  celles  qui  se  font  a  vide. 

Coules  De  Trois   Notes 

Pincez  le  Mi  et  appuyez  successivement  le  ler.  doigt  sur  le  Fa  et  le  Se  mi 
le  Sol. 


Example. 


Step  the  Sol,  and  successively  remove  the  fingers  to  produce  the  Fa  and  I       Pincez  le  Sol  et  reUrez  successivement  les  doigts  pour  faire  le  F.  et  U 


ielfc. 


JEfeE3jEE¥=£sfe3g^||g*=ft 


Scales,  too,  may  be  executed  in  slurred  notes,  ascending  or 
loscending,  by  a  mere  sliding  of  the  thumb. 

In  this  scale  you  set  the  open  string  to  vibrating,  with  the 
Ihumb,  letting  it  slide  fro.n  string  to  string. 


On  peut  aussi  executer  des  gammes  en  notes  coulees,  tant  en 
montant  qu'en  descendant,  d'un  seul  trait. 

Dans  cette  gamme,  on  met  la  corde  a  vide  en  vibration  a?M 

le  pouce  en  le  glissant  de  corde  en  corde. 


Example. 


HipppEiggiSiiiii 

-*r    -•-  •  ^  S 


In  this  last  you  sharp  the  first  note,  and  slur  all  the  rest 


|       Dans  celle-ci  on  pince  la  Ire.  note  et  1'on  coule  tout  le  rente 


~ vlbra ~ * T 2 

^Ibr vlbraTI _ «. 

vlbr.         vlb 


Doubts  notes  a. jo  may  be  slurred,  but  only  two  by  two 
Example. 


sra^ffi 


fc^Eg^rpgEJ 


On  coule  aussi  les  doubles  notes ;   mais  seulement  d«  dent 
en  deux. 

•^- 4 


s^iiis 


UAV.jASbi   S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOE    THE    UTJITAK. 


43 


The  Slide. 

The  Slide  is  performed  by  one  finger  of  the  left  hand,  which 
glides  along  the  neck  in  passing  over  all  the  frets  from  the  1st 
to  the  2d  note,  after  having  struck  with  the  right  hand  the  first 
»f  the  two  notes.  The  slide  produces  a  good  effect  on  the 
guitar,  because  it  imitates  the  sound  of  the  voice.  It  is  indicated 
bv  this  sign 


Da  son  Glisse  on  Porte. 

Le  son  glisse  on  porte,  s'execute  par  un  seul  doigt  ae  la  man; 
gauche,  qui  glisse  le  long  du  manche  en  passant  sur  tomes  lei 
touches  de  la  premiere  a  la  deuxieme  note,  apres  avcir  attaqiw 
la  premiere  des  deux  notes  avec  la  main  droite. 

Le  glisse  produit  un  bon  effet  sur  la  Guitare,  parcequ'il  imiU 
le  son  porte  de  la  voix. 

II  s'indique  par  ce  signe 


Slide  the  2d  finger  from  F  to  A. 


f#77«-S?- 


L3#=E= 


i-  *-,-_jF  J. 

i — I     i 1      r» 


£? 


i 


Slide  the  3d  finger  from  D  to  B. 


zc: 


m&=h*B 


Glissez  le  2e  doigt  du  Fa  au  La. 
Slides  are  also  performed  in  double  notes. 


Glissez  le  8e  doigt  du  Re  au 


I 


k 


On  fait  aussi  des  glisses  en  doubles  notes. 


Small  Notes  or  Appoggiatnra. 

This  name  is  given  to  a  small  note,  which  sometimes  is  of 
half  the  value  of  the  note  which  it  precedes.  In  this  case  it  is 
the  ong  Appoggiatura.  and  when  it  has  but  a  very  short  dura- 
tion it  is  called  the  short  Appoggiatura. 

To  distinguish  the  short  from  the  long  Appoggiatura,  the 
former  is  crossed  at  the  end.  The  small  notes  are  played  the 
Bame  as  slurs,  giving  an  impulse  to  the  small  note  with  the 
right  hand,  and  making  the  principal  note  sound  with  the  finger 
of  the  left  hand. 

When  a  common  note,  preceded  by  a  small  note,  is  accompa- 
nied by  one  or  more  parts,  the  small  note  must  be  played  with 
the  accompanying  parts,  and  the  principal  note  be  slurred  imme- 
diately. 


Des  petites  notes  on  Appoggiatnres. 

On  donne  ce  nom  a  une  petite  note  qui  souvent  prend  b 
moitie  de  la  valeur  de  la  note  qu'elle  precede.  Dans  ce  cas, 
c'est  l'appoggiature  longue,  et  quand  elle  n'a  qu'une  tris  courts 
duree,  on  l'appelle  appoggiature  breve. 

Pour  distinguer  l'appoggiature  breve  de  la  longue,  on  l'ecril 
par  une  croche  coupee  d'nne  ligne  transversale.  Les  petites 
notes  s'executent  comme  les  coules  en  donnant  l'impulsion  de  la 
main  droite  a  la  petite  note,  et  en  faisant  resonner  la  note  princi- 
pal avec  le  doigt  de  la  main  gauche.  Lorsqu'une  note  or  ];- 
naire,  precedee  d'une  petite  note,  est  accompagnee  d  une  3i) 
plusieurs  parties,  il  faut  pincer  la  petite  note  avec  .es  parties 
d'accompagnement  et  couler  immediatement  la  note  principile. 


Long  small  notes. 
Petites  notes  longues. 


Short  small  notes. 
Petites  notes  breves. 


Written. 


flayed. 


Iph 


jgsgggg^rT 


Gfloall  nrtia  to  be    Oayed  with  the  notes  of  Accompaniment  Petites  notes  frappant  avec  des  notes  d'accompagnement. 


tin 


E 


-a 


3L_^ p_ 


£ 


^33=^  J=±  jz:  z»zzi5^r=*-pzt 


f 


4  A 


flAKCASSI'S     INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR 


Double  Small  Notes,  or  Apnoggiaturas.  i  Pctitcs  Notes  Doubles. 

Two  Appoggiaturas  are  executed  in  the  same  manner  as  two  Les  petites  notes  doubles  s'executent  par  le  meme  mcyen  q  « 
pnncipa  notes  slurred;  only  with  more  rapidity,  since  the  lat-  les  coules  de  deux  notes:  mais  avec  plus  de  vitesse  paicequ'on 
rer  recede  their  full  value,  whereas  the  small  notes  borrow  |  donne  aux  notes  coulees  toute  la  valeur  qu'elles  represented. 
■~mewhat  from  the  duration  of  the  prmcipal  notes.  I  tandis  que  les  petites  notes  ne  s'executent  qu'a-1X  depens  de  a 

I  valeur  des  notes  principales. 


Indication- 


Execution. 


3^ES 


a 


-i- 


s 


js=3 


wm 


^^^^ 


-*-* 


i 


;hort  pieces  for  the  practice  op  awog- 
giaturas. 


PETITS  MORCEAUX  POUR  EXERCER  LES  PETITES 
NOTES. 


fc 


Houera^   j&-#0; 


^  "  m-^ ■ — — — — — - ^ _ —      ■-     i  J  w 


nf 


~S7~ 


IT* — »• 


*#« 


=*#Jss=3 


S £ 


II 


-idJMMxd 


4 

I  7    I    ^    i 


r* 


— — -  m        ~-        d~ 


^-m i •• •        *    «    *  w— 


-&- 


-Jf-f 


»»/p: 


g 


-Is'- 


"P5"  =  ^   ~^~       T '      =77      s 


<^  ■'■        =     •      ^f7-^=T7~7^      —  ^r— =^ 

irr  I  >  r  ^=  =  = 


^  '  f^  ~f!^  -&rr 


«7 


-p- 


"p" 


I*--— -jr 


7     7  Is* 


i*  f^  i   ^       r^         T--    =     ?*5 


p    y-r 


CARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOE    THE    GUITAR. 


Of  the  Gruppetto.  r  Bn  Gronppetto. 

This  is  the  name  of  a  group  of  appoggiatura  notes,  composed  I       On  nomme  ainsi  un  groupe  de  petites  nc-.es  compost  de   M 


)f  the  principal  note  and  its  auxiliary  note  immediately   above 
ind  below.     It  is  indicated  and  performed  in  three  ways  • 

1.  By  beginning  with  the  principa.  ncis,  A  (#N  "X-.) 

2.  By  beginning  with  the  auxiliary  above,  B  (^-.) 

3.  By  beginning  with  the  auxiliary  below,  C  (-V.) 
This  is  caJed  inverted  in  most  treatises,  and  indicated  (j>.) 


rjote  principale  et  de  l'auxiliaire  superieure  et  inferiaire.     Q  eet 
imdique  et  s'execute  de  trois  manieres : 

lo.     En  commengant  par  la  note  principale  nvec  una  jeliK 

note,  A  (JV  **<.) 

2o.     Par  l'auxiliaire  superieure,  B  ('^.) 
3o.     Par  l'auxiliaire  inferieure,  C  ("^•.) 


Indication.  / 


Execution, 


EXAMPLE. 


c 


13 


Gruppetto  beginning  with  the  principal  note. 
Gruppetto  commengant  par  la  note  principale. 


=£ 


./ith  the  note  above. 

Par  l'auxiliaire  superieure. 


With  the  note  below. 
Par  l'auxiliaire  inferieure. 


M 


^  'IT  Est 


^c 


tst 


S:" 


I 


I 


If  a  little  note  of  the  gruppetto  is  to  be  altered  by  a  Sharp  or 
f'.at,  it  is  thus  indicated  for  the  auxiliary  above,  (,£,,)  and  thus 
or  tho  auxiliary  beiow,  (^.) 


Si  une  petite  note  du  grouppetto  devait  etre  alteree  par  un 
dieze  ou  bemol,  on  l'indique  ainsi  pour  l'auxiliaire  superieure 
(■4L»)  et  Pour  l'auxiliaire  inferieure,  C5".) 


Indication. 


Execution, 


-I *_ 


With  the  upper  auxiliary  altered. 
Avec  l'auxiliaire  superieure  alteree. 


With  the  lower  auxiliary  altered. 
Avec  l'auxiliaire  inferieure  alteree. 


BEE f^r1^^-, 


-i^i 


JE* 


tmz 


|S 


JSl 


1 


Wlien  tne  Gruppetto  stands  between  two  piincipal  notes,  it  is 
i3  ways  commenced  with  the  upper  auxiliary. 


Qnand  le  grouppetto  se  trouve  place  entre    leux  note*  ro  •« 
commence  toujours  par  l'auxiliaire  superieure. 


Indication. 


Kiecntion 


4r^ — a 


M^z* 


f     1 


wmi 


»       ! 


I 


^=^ 


m 


4N» 


OARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR. 


Of  the  Trill. 

The  TriD  ia  where  a  note  alternates,  for  a  longer  or  shorter 
lime,  pncorcing  to  its  value,  and  very  rapidly,  with  the  note 
which  is  a  tone  or  half  a  tone  above  it,  and  which  is  termed 
the  auxiliary  note.  The  Trill  should  generally  begin  and  end 
<*ith  the  principal  note.  Every  Trill  should  have  a  termina- 
tion ;  this  termination  consists  of  the  tone  or  semitone  below, 
followed  by  the  principa'  note.     (See  following  Examples.) 

On  the  Guitar  the  Trill  is  made  in  three  ways: 

1.  By  snapping  the  first  note,  and  slurring  the  rest  of  the 
Trill. 

%  By  snapping  the  principal,  and  slurring  the  auxiliary 
note. 

3.  By  taking  the  two  notes  upon  two  different  strings  with 
the  left  hand,  and  snapping  them  with  two  or  three  fingers. 


Da  Trille  on  Cadence. 

Le  Trille  est  une  note  qui  selon  sa  valeur,  alterne  plj»  01 
moins  longtems,  et  tres  vite,  avec  une  autre  note  qui  se  trou 
un  ton,  ou  un  demi-ton  plus  haut,  et  qu'on  nomme  note  auxu 
iaire.  Le  trille  doit  generalement  commencer  par  la  note 
principale,  et  finir  avec  elle.  Chaque  trille  doit  recevoir  une  ter- 
minaison ;  cette  terminaison  consiste  dans  un  ton  ou  demi-tor 
inferieur  suivi  de  la  note  principale.  (Voyez  les  exemplei 
suivans.) 

Sur  la  Guitare  on  fait  le  trille  de  trois  manieres : 

lo.  En  pingant  la  premiere  note  et  en  coulant  le  reste  A( 
trille. 

2o.  En  pingant  la  note  principale  et  en  coulant  ia  note  anx 
iliaire. 

3o.  En  preparant  les  deux  notes  sur  deux  cordes  diffe'rentei 
avec  la  main  gauche,  et  en  les  pingant  avec  deux  ou  trois  doigt 


Indication.  ; 


Execution. 


cfcfc 


^W- 


1st  manner. 
Ire  maniere. 

— & — 


m 


2d  manner. 
2me  maniere. 

— & 


Termination. 
Terminaison. 


m 


Indication. 


Execution. 


3d  Manner. 
Sine  Maniere. 


•  Just  so  with  an  accompaniment ; 

•  Us  la  mfinw)  maniere  avec  une  partle  I  * 
\  |v  d'aceompagnement.  >  * 


1 


351 


Fingering  of  the  Right  hand. 
On  le  doigte  avec  la  main  droite. 


g^jgjgj^ 


-£- 


a 


Frr*n*rH*rn^rr  r  s  i  je 


w r 


m 


m 


When  the  short  duration  of  the  note  on  which  the  Trill  is 
made,  or  when  the  following  note  prevents  a  termination,  it  is 
no  longe   a  Trill,  but  merely  a  note  trilled. 


Lorsque  la  courte  duree  de  Ia  note  sur  laquelle  on  tan  i» 
trille,  ou  la  note  suivante  empeche  de  faire  une  terminaison,  m 
n'est  plus  alors  un  trille,  mais  simplement  une  note  tril  t«. 


Indication. 


Execution. 


Usually  written. 
Signes  usit£s. 


T 


CAKOASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS     FOR    THE    GUITAB. 


47 


Of  the  Mordente. 

This  ornament  is  a  fragment  of  a  Trill.  It  is  made  upon  long 
mt  short  notes  ;  but  has  a  particularly  fine  effect  upon  the 
latter ;  it  is  indicated  by  the  sign,  w 


Dn  Mordente. 

Cet  ornement  est  un  fragment  du  trille.  II  se  fa  t  sur  dei 
notes  longues  et  courtes  :  il  est  surtout  d'un  bftl  effet  sur  cm 
dernieres ;  on  l'indique  par  ce  signe.  w 


Indication. 


Execution. 


r#I 


w^mm 


-*-++ 


M 


Mordente  upon  long  notes. 
Mordente  sur  des  notes  longues. 


Mordente  upon  short  notes. 
Mordente  sur  des  notes  courtes. 


t±D 


S 


S^^E^^Pfr^ 


Aidantino. 


•f 


jg^jjg^^Sfe^ 


ra» 


v  r 


,T    w. 


I 


i   m.  m — r- 


Muffled  Tones. 

To  damp  or  smother  the  sounds,  you  have  only  to  placs  the 
fingers  of  the  right  hand  upon  the  strings  just  snapped,  after 
illowing  them  to  vibrate  during  their  written  value,  (whhh  is 
lere  a  sixteenth.) 

'  Chords  of  five  or  six  notes  are  sharped  by  laying  the  palm  of 
he  right  hand  upon  all  the  strings,  near  the  rosette. 


Sons  Etonffcs. 

Pour  etouffer  les  sons,  il  suffit  de  poser  les  doigts  de  la  mail; 
droite  sur  les  cordes  qu'ils  viennent  de  pincer,  apres  les  avoit 
laisse  vibrer  pendant  la  valeur  qu'elles  representent  qui  est  d'un 
seizieme. 

Les  accords  de  cinq  ou  six  notes  s'etouffent  en  posant  la  pan1 
me  de  la  main  droite  sur  toutes  les  cordes,  pres  de  la  rosette. 


tostcnuto. 


SEE 


^ 
i 


-  *'   i- 


"-J-f-y— 4f 


*rt 1  I   -r  j  J    ti-L-f  * 


:a# 


1-i 


=FS 


**- 


£11     n    y    y    ST  7    7 


-•-  S  7~ 


-y-^ 


-7— 


*f 


-»-s- 


~  •>  /  _j-  y  '    '.* 


s  y 


s  y   #f*~l~7 


r 


A 


3 


4 


/ 


f 


Thumbs. 
Pouee. 


-7-7- 


«fc 


±E 


■g-r  y 


z 


y  y 


48 


CARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR. 


Positions. 

There  are  twelve  positions  on  the  finger-board  of  the  Guitar ; 
nmong  those  there  are  five  which  are  called  J  rincipal  positions, 
its  they  are  most  in  use.  and  a  knowledge  of  them  is  sufficient 
-o  get  acquainted  with  the  others. 

These  positions  are  the  1st,  4th,  5th,  7th  and  9th. 

The  study  oi  the  Gamut,  of  the  exercises  and  the  following 
pieces,  in  those  different  positions,  will  be  sufficient  for  this 
purpose. 

GAMUT  IN  THE  FOURTH  POSITION. 


Positions. 

II  y  a  douzj  positions  sur  le  mane  he  de  la  Guitare  ;  para.:  o 
nombre  il  y  en  a  cinq  qu'  on  nomme  positions  principales,  par 
cequ'elles  sont  les  plus  usitees,  et  que  leur  connaissance  suffi 
pour  donner  l'intelligence  des  autres. 

Ces  positions  sont :  la  Ire,  4me,  5me,  7me  et  9me. 

L'etude  des  gammes,  exercices,  et  morceaux  suivants,  a  cei 
differentes  positions,  suffira  pour  arriver  a  c.e.  resultat. 


GAMME  A  LA  QUATRIEME  POSITION, 


5=* 


6th  String. 
6me  Corde. 


5th. 
5me. 


4th. 
4me. 


3d. 

Sine. 


2d. 

2me. 


1st 
Ire. 


w 


wrf^ 


5=? 


m 


iPiffi 


i 


fe^ 


i 


Fiercise.  j£^r-*p- 


J^P&±^ 


s 


?^ 


a^^fH^ff^fe 


th. 


4th  Pos. 


Walt,  j^^ 


^T- 


l^h 


=2=2- 


n 


s=m^ 


s^m 


fEEES 


-f—r 


=£^P= 


mfl 


S= 


=& — uj — y       y — ^ 


& 


g^gga 


^ 


CS33t 


f 


« •- 


^ 


J=^3-W 


D.*  C.    8l 


U 


CABCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR 
Gamut  in  the  Fifth  Position.  |  Gamme  A"  La  Cinquiemc  Position. 


49 


6th  String. 
6me  Corde. 


4th. 
4me. 


4th. 

4me. 


Sd. 
Sine. 


2d. 

2me. 


1st. 
Ire. 


i^^ff 


=F^tF=5=F   J II  j     '     *=tFT 

-J-       -+■  »  3  4  13  4  1 

f  4  1 


S^I 


^ 


SF^ff 


3  12  4 


Exercise. 


r^f^M^F 


3t=t 


B^£ 


^3  '  J  J  J 


S 


t 


-#— * 


-d- 


* i 


^■e 


I 


4th  Pos. 


Great  Barrer. 


Prelude. 


^=S 


i 


J  I  "    ! 


3=^ro 


»»- 


SE 


*  ;  w  *-*-*-*- 


IS)-3 fr- 


r 


3d  Pos. 1st  Pob. 


1    I    I    I1 


bt 


s 


I    I    I    I    I" 


3$ 


HI 

* < 


^§5 


^H 


-^ 


■J 


5th  Pos. 


jlndantino  z:£:3fc: 


^5 


mosso. 


-* — m- 


tt*F^T) 


2=E 


5^j^^=n-^^=| 


P^S 


pi  1 


1         mf 


P 


y 


1        mf 


/I    y 


J  -S-  f  J  y   i 


i  =d 


(T — F-\ — E 


_L_ 


^f1 


t    7 


y  ggTC 


^ft^Jt^^^^^Ji^ 


J=i 


i 


Hrf*^i 


7         m/ 


1 


-»■  y     » 

y         ^ 


i^te 


u^ 


£§=! 


5S 


B 


•«-#■ 


SH 


ea 


^^*3-  D.C.  iS 


p 


s 


rri 


,*-  y 


50 


OARCASSI'S     INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR 
Gamut  in  the  Seventh  Position.  |  Gamine  a  la  Scptieme  Position 


«th  String. 
6me.  Corde. 


5th. 
5me. 


4th. 
4me. 


3d. 
8me. 


2d. 
2me. 


1st. 
Ire. 


r  ;  4 


^ 


£ 


Jr — o- 


— V ft- 


i4M 


m 


Ksereise.  W^ 


e^zzjz 


r^S 


S 


U 


5££k0M^M 


*-#-•- 


=£ 


mmm 


[""■L^X 


S* 


£^ 


■g=* 


L_d      d 


# — L—j. 


7th  Pos 


6th  Pos. 


t  tO— f  i«s ft 


Prelude. 


sr6- 


J3 


.-□. 


»E^=&^ 


isizEzh: 


-^  j_  i   i   :  ^3 


I 


1st.  Pos. 


f 


^^^^s 


Allegretto. 


7th  Pos. 


§iSP 


F 


3" 


i=^=i= 


=^3 


f 


^3 


JFS    *iZ  ^? 


S-T- 


&.J 


r~ 


IS 


J  J^a 


j    i    r 


4fes 


^ 


^b%^=4 


— -3-» 0 


I 


a 


JZp 


i 


,fc^=jUlTJ^-r3T  ^^,rfm 


=1 


i 


f 


i R 


f 


CABUASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAB 

Gamut  in  the  ninth  Fvflitin.  Gamut  a  la  rariSme  /ositimm. 


51 


r~t 


II 


^mmm^m 


££jt£^ 


11 


134  134  13  124  124 


f       » 


££fe£ 


P*^ 


^^-^^^E^j 


-W- 


g^l^f^i. 


9th  Pos.- 


7  th  Pos- 


Prelude,  zfcfc*: 


4th  Pos- 

2  I  2  4 


f  —  r*  Lmm-mmmM-— p"  ~  mmmmmmmi    i^g        


iSt 


8* 


" 


^M^kk^^^m 


r 


9th  Pos. 


i.legretto.ft^^r         t 


f 


w 


iSEES 


#/ 


-P- 


■P- 


.  ^  &n  j  ^u^MkM^fziMMiMJkMM 


i 


£ 


i 


-r- 


-r- 


=*=mC 


r        ^       ^  ^   ^  7_rv   t  TV 


1 


I 


r 


*     5? 


i 


^^gJiJii^vT;.,^  r  ,tt4 


i 


=      A 


-/=* 


^     r 


— =nryy  _ , — . 


§1 


j-2 


OARCAPSI   S     INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    UuiTAR 


There  are  cases  where  ve  profit  by  a  note  played  upon  an 
open  string,  to  pass  with  greater  facility  from  one  position  to 
mother,  this  note  is  indicated  by  a  (o)  which  is  placed  over  a 
wrte 

9th  Pos 
1st  Pos. 0 


II  y  a  des  cas  ou  I 'on  profite  d'une  note  executee  sur  une  corae 
a  vide  pour  passer  plus  facilement  d'une  position  a  l'autre,  cett« 
note  est  indiquee  par  un  (o)  que  1'on  place  sur  la  note  meme. 


ftample.  J^^rrfgS™ 


SthPos... ■■■■■■■    ......  9lhPos. o  l8tpo8> 

lilmliiiiSiiif 


"Sr 


m 


T 


Sometimes  the  first  finger  is  drawn  back  one  fret,  without  the  I      Quelquefois,  dans  une  position,  le  ler  doigt  recule  en  arrier. 
.ontiou  of  the  hand  being  altered  on  that  account.  d'une  touche  sans  que  pour  cela,  la  main  quitte  cette  'position. 


9th  Pos. 


Example. 


3-J55  j.  d-A  J553.J553 


■?&*?'— — r-a-r-r-Ti— i£ 


■Gf- 
31 


:g El^EEzEEEEEEEEE^^-^lk 


The  four  following  pieces  are  written  so  that  the  pupil  may 
go  through  the  different  positions. 


T 


Les  quatre  morceaux  suivans  sont  ecnts  pour  apprendre  i 
parcourir  les  differentes  positions. 


Allegretto.  iJSF*ji|=§= 


4th  Po>.- 

.a 


4=i 


-•-•- 


g      r 


T" 


W-«-j 


p 


2       */  -" 


4th  Pos. 


W~+"1  ■  1st  Pos.         I 


4th  Pos, 


2d  Pos. 9th  Pos. 


I  I 


~sr 


9th  Pok 


H.^3 


CARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS     FOR    THE    GUITAR. 


53 


flth  Pos. 


illegr«tt«J5:| 


Cj 


WOZZZ^iWOgZJ. 


■|ipp- 


W?/ 


IT 

T~ r 


--d-H-d-j— L-L 


lfit  Pos. 


i 


'-*    -     =£=    Tr-fg^-H 


-P'  Fin.         I<^  ^ 


T— I 


~| 1 ZZ[ 


J I  II i 


:j=i — 5= 


i~* — c 


-m>- 


S~-m^ 


•cgz. 


— =cr  e 


3&E*E 


/ 


C    M    " 


5th  Pos.  ■ 


I     I     ! 


■n 


if         ^  ^ 


:q^=l 


-» — P 

i    i 


1  »        wi  *n 


P 


=A 


~^E^ 


-i       »i 


7  th  Pos . •  •  • 

M  T  <=  —  ^&-  ^-^  ^  IT  —  — 


Allegretto.^  jjEzr 


7th  Pos. 

r— — a-= — p =j—  9  •  0  «1  ~*l         »    •  »    •  *    •       _* 


3 I* 


f-  f- 


-» r 

1*  Si 


m 


*E*E*=^ 


:  2d  Pos. 


^£ 


lrlj>  1±±_  A±^^J^_ 


^-- 


z_j — ~  — | — _ ji — — — g — —  - 

zr  *~5T»        «i    _.       _- 


"p* 


f-         T 

5th  Poa 7th  Pos. 


if—.,,     .m.    0     *i ~-T"  ZZ.  ""        ^^"  ^p   •  ^> 


54 


CAECASSI'S     INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR. 


Walti. 


9th  Pos.      -J. 

— S     I       = 


"3-  ^#j.^^i 


i>?  ^ 


f"' 


T 


T 


fc* 


5th  Pos. 


12  ~     JT1 


At 


"r 


7™X 


a* 


^2^ 


jEE"E  -y^-i*— f— *-] 


r  *^ 


!   9th  Poi., C^SS-  -/""j"*"!      C  H   ~    !      j     J    i  -/ 


&e=t= 


i 


1st  Pos. 


4th  Pos. 


Barre. 


—  -j»"  -m-    M  '      —     /  7  pi 


1st  Pos. 


r#-* 


:«=* 


PggfJEg 


I      4th  Pos. 
M ,»„-_ » *_ 


=3* 


-* — •- 


¥=£=* 


t=£ 


-p-        ##-  Tar    T     r=    7      '       7m/ 

r       P  it 


U 


^fe^^^^fSiitfi 


—    ^ 


9th  Pos.. 


gggg^rg^ijgl  «ra  ,  ^  3  i±l  rwz  rz 


5th  Pos. 


m=m 


i 


7* 


,^-fa^ 


am.     ~d\  '.d. 


id  Pos.- 


P^^gP 


nt 


**-        =S 


*F 


_c 


^ 


r   -, 


J       J 


te* 


bar. 


ISP** 


^Jde^^l ^"n .fi  Jii^^^s  J  jsq 


p 


r 

""  •  •  •  ist  Pos. 

ipilllll^IliiFi^ 


-r* 


S^ 


' 


f 


fW^m^wgmm 


CARCASSI   S     INSTRUCTIONS    *OR    THE    GUITAR. 


55 


-S" 


^ 


V-J- 


m 


tS 


^Sg 


33- 


rr^r 


7th  Pos.- 


ffl-S" 


^SeI^e 


L^B^553 


"  "^gH^Jg3' 


4#- 


/3 


^B^ 


9th  Pos. 


Bar ^—. aH«  p^~~ 

*  j  id.  j.  ITa  a  m*  5?^^ 
S^p^es^  - ,  j  *J      i— =^ 


-*-jtj  -#• 


2d  Pos.- 


S^SS 


7th  Pos.- 


^ 


I 


S^j^^^^ 


I 


IHHl 


9th  Pos.- 


5b: 


^FtT: 


5  j  «^~5  ^-1  r>  ±lTi  J.  .  j   aT? 


a*- 


m 


i 


mj 


5th  Pos.  ■ 


T3— 1 


'  f  T 


£Q 


? 


x=fc£=e=te 


2d  Pos. 


*#*; 


g 


#-#- 


^t 


a 


-• m- 


9th  Pos.      f" 


-± *' 


i.  :*:    :*:  A 


yj 


3.  i 


P — _— E 


E3EEEE 


Minor.  • 


LH 


1st  Pos. 


S3: 


j^p^^uS^ J-,  g 


Dalee.     i 


lA3i 


-5-5  J  3  1  j^,  v 


js_uSl3^ 


50 


CARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUtTAR. 


+-M 


^~r~3  » — i  t— * * — *- 


r        r 


r 


JiV  -9-  le  Poo. 


"r 


*     / y 


=i=* 


s^= 


* — •- 


•M-^l 


sp^ 


fi^tfgBI 


9th  Pos- 


^ 


f ^ 

I  Dolce. 


.jn^nn  ^"g~g:  -HT"]_ 


-*«L 


r       r 


r 


■p" 


MAJOR.      9*  Pos-- 


^-tf^i  ^^pC^^iS^jji^sjTa 


ig 


-r 


T 


r       r 


5tn  Pos- 


P" 


~r 


^^~l,iL^i 


T~2    j 


2d  Pos- 


1         = 


3t=Zlt 


TT.     J 


i*=^*= 


-*-Ph» 


E^ 


B 


9th  Pos- 


i-         f        r         r 


s= 


■ 1st  Pos 9th 

-  + f — 1-*-2 a 1— — 1 


-r        r 

9th  Pos.  Ecart 


7^ 

?tb  Pos.  2d  Pos. 


w 


9th  Pos- 


^    gg; 


r 


ibSS: 


r^? 


s^ 


7th  Pos.-  •  2d  Pos. 


r#-#- 


F 


IPfeifef 


r 


*• •- 


r 


? 


n»      i»- 


-# * — •- 


2_- 


:h 


r 


"IF 


r 

•4  -ni 


r 


j 


-g — *- 


r 


ST 


?=3= 


3m     .      -^HT~' 


f* 


r 


GAROABSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOE    THE    uulTAR. 


57 


Of   Double    Notes. 

On  the  Guitar  there  are  passages  of  double  notes  ir  thirds, 
lixths,  octaves,  and  tenths  ;  to  facilitate  their  execution,  it  is 
necessary  to  slide  the  fingers  as  much  as  possible,  in  passing 
from  one  fret  to  another. 

In  these  first  exercises  the  fingers  which  are  to  slide  are 
marked  by  small  lines  placed  between  the  numbers,  to  indicate 
tbe  fingering  of  the  left  hand. 

Gamut    in    Thirds. 


Des    Doubles    Notes. 

Sur  la  Guitare,  on  fait  des  passages  de  doubles  notes  en 
tierces,  sixtes,  octaves  et  dixiemes ;  pour  en  faciliter  l'execu- 
tion,  il  faut,  autant  que  possible  glisser  les  doigts  en  passant 
d'une  case  a  l'autre. 

Dans  ces  premiers  exercices,  les  doigts  qui  doivent  glissei 
sont  marques  par  de  petits  traits  d'union  entre  les  chifFres  wi 
indiquer  le  doigte  de  la  main  gauche. 

Gamme    en    Tierces. 


F         #     ff      CS      2^       X       8-88-8-8-8       8-8-8-3-3-8-3       1       4       2      '0      I         [       [     f 
I  '.       1       a  ■      .    , 1       *       2 


1-1 


Exercise. 


o      3       1 

Si 


"i-W 


r 


3d  Pos.       I 

r    4* 


IS 


It 


yr                     "[       f     f      r     r    jtft&^   ^ 
-=rft xf- r-r^-r  f       [>— i"     r    r 


-#■ 


-*s> 


-ip*— 

3 


-a»- 


:F 


r  -  r 

El!iEJEt- 


fe 


4, 

-1- 


3fe= 


zm,-zr— zrz = 


r 


■t= 


12 


m^ 


"?3~ 


E£ 


^B 


Gamut  in  Sixths. 

4 


Si 


~  %  ^-  r  7  T 


f^ 


4-42144  Gai 

2-2       3-3-3-3-3-3       » 


Gamme  en  Sixtes. 

I L  -i 4_ 


^3 


^Pif|^gE:3 


-p-r 


~r 


Exercise.  4p£ 


a 


r 


i^ 


a      b      3 
2 


r 


f  i*~  f1 


8^**l 


3=2     J 


? 


iff W-J 


jjgfA    ,«Ug^L 


J  J  2  ? 


2- 


3        19-3  3  _  ^J^*-*^  '  - ■  J* 


58 


OAROASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS     FOR    THE    GUITAR. 


_-Jr-S        3  — ^— 1         I 1     ?\~  *  I 1 T— I 


Gamnt  in  Octaves. 


4-4-4-4-4-V#       4  -  4  -  4  -  4GammC    **    ^k^ 

4011     J-i^^~^±l^        I      *        o 


„-^i o      2,        I  IL   J     *L~*~ ~ -*-   -«L     ,,  I     4       1      o  _      o        1 

^ttt  I C  '  '*  *  °  1-1-1-1 -i-^-i^t-t  rf  f  r  -ryffff 
IT  t  3  °  °  a  &  I  £  t  a 

4-4-4 i    , 


Scale  in  Tenths. 


damme  en  Dixiemes. 


4-4----1 4 

-      o     1       4      9      1,     «j      o      1         I    J     J    J.   AI^   J.   J        I        I      1     o     4     1  ! 

fo      1       8     °  3  3  323       2       3 


flABOASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOB    THE    GUITAR 

=»-  2       2 £il  Z=-  1-1 2      1 

#  r  r       i      i .      r         i        i 

_____  :=="  1i-_li_i_L-_i        !  -  1  B  ? 

P        a         -  a   "^^^"zr: — ~Lz±-8-=nr=nr- ^-ir^-^- _        _         ' 


r  -p-  "» 

-i-i -!  a.^*--!    ii---      2r-i__i    2 


'  2-21-1  2^1-1 

^ ~~^: ~ ~ _ s 1  F^r 

"•/i»:  -p1  1st  f  F"  "f 


,  i  i  fi-y~r     jiii  J^v    'r-2 ~i  f>    'i — m  'fl 


Eees 


t~    r 


T 


f~    T 


^ s- a I— F F— —  x^.— s-=-3— 2— ^ "rz:  •— p 

r  r  '  P  F"  i  ' 

2-2  42       4__2   -     2  2       4       4  2       4_;,^        3 

LX2-J  ^^^  3_"3  "C---^         U-p^3       3  1       3-3-3 

2-2-2-2  2-2  ,  2-9-2-3  4  2  28  2    -    2 


:  -  3       3       1       3       ~ 
2-2-2-2  2-2  _,  2-9-2-2  _____       2  3       g.         ,       3 

=-__-SE_y£^j^^f3^___f__J^g__? 

q      a      a      l      * ^L_  :  ffr  uu  'o        _-___-_-_i  __»L— __-i 

3      a      d       a      —-— ■     i'      J  Tl___l--"""^         l  i_j_i3  3  1  al  i 

4-4  2—2—2-2-2  2—24  '  4 

U-**    '         1       U"  \  "*3  -  3  8       13       1  3 

4.      a 

o       2  I      "I         I         I         -■-. 


2-9-2-2  4  2  2       2  2    -    2 

4-4  J  -  -J      a 

47  U>  1       8      51- 3  _3_3  3-3-3-3-3  1—-  1       I-—,        3-3  8131  a 

B 

*,       £      a       2       4_4       a       2       4-__L2 


i-3-3-3    -    3 


GO 


OARCASSI'S    INSThUCTlONS    FOR    THE    GUITAh 

Moileralo* _  P"_  1'    ._" 


Study.    J^z 


^MM 


r- 


sa^ 


g^gg#^ma^lEMl^ 


zMzzt 


--£=»—  i-U 


y   r  J 


r-r-f^  v  J-  f  -^t^-p1-  r  1  ~^-g-r  'J   r;f  ^r 


"      — e      -i 


fTt 


ffi^ 


s^^e 


.L_f-  *" 


f? 


**   jgj^gj 


mile. 


p « i A- A 4 o a 


f     t     *  :: 


*-T  i1  I       =£- 


J        4 


-4  +~4 -— ^— y— f-f-P 


** 


£j-JlJ 


9th  Pos 


u 


TB 


4  ^§?^ 


g" 


j_ jtt:: ^jgj^  \j~m ± * i 


&     \    .1 


tirw 


»  p 


-  -  -  *J- A  fg^£j  J3,rj  -^ 


*/= 


rfdz 


I * 


I 


i 


4 


a 


S 


-*- 


fc*= 


32E 


0 » i i- 


4=4: 


r 


r  'b? 


:*:    #«L     ^ 


-4 4 4r 


-4 Jr 1 


fe^ 


^ 


*P" 


mnr&sw^m^ 


■1. 


3*3 


Efife 


si  *J-  J.     at 


ii^Pl^pg 


j^IxnT&^a+J&M^ 


3"T3 


^ 


w^rs 


WW^&WWWf 


I 


—   5:    »/—  -^ 


CARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    G   ,1TAR. 


61 


£n  passages  of  thirds,  sixths,  and  tenths,  sometimes  we  find 
ai  accompanying  part  which  rests  upon  a  single  continuous 
iiote,  and  which  is  put  in  to  produce  an  effect  peculiar  to  the 
guitar.  This  part  should  always  be  executed  upon  an  open 
string,  even  if  the  other  parts  are  higher ;  in  which  case  they 
•liould  be  taken  upon  strings  below  the  open  string. 


On  trouve  quelquefois,  avec  des  passages  en  tierces,  sixtei 
et  dixiemes,  une  autre  partie  continue  d'accompagnement  qui 
devient  superieure  ou  intermediate  pour  produire  des  effets  par 
ticuliers  a  la  Guitare.  Cette  partie  doit  toujours  etre  executee 
sur  une  corde  a  vide  quand  meme  les  autres  parties  seraient  plus 
aigiies  ;  dans  ce  dernier  cas,  on  les  doigte  sur  les  cordes  imme- 
diatement  inferieures  a  la  corde  a  vide. 


EXAMPLE. 


Thirds. 

Tierces. 


rirr*- 


5* iM=M£: 


-*  oaj^^p 


i 


5zfrr  '=F?* 


EXEMPLE. 
o 


m 


«f— p 


m 


Sixths. 

Sixtes. 


o        o, 

B 


f I I        I      la         b       I*       i      ¥- 

-e-™— pES— P-t—E — £-1— FT 

— -t-=£=#z::siIEd=f=F==5=:t3 


J-  g 


:EC2E 


1-2 


J: 


r — r — f— dm      —  Lr "- 


Dixiemes.fffl— J5I_L 


o-i#- 

I 


o  o 


>  Oj,        04 

U--J- 


-*•- 


Study. 

fetude. 


tfl* 


"IF 


~\r 


f  Q»' '~p»~   e  J  a*      I    ..  J'e* 


fc        i       li       Is       Is 


3  I 


>y=r 


-*#- 


'Ti#K  *fc,t 


F 


/>/ 


*= 


h«_# j_  I     I     :     I   j 


:t»zz^ — i 

1 


•F 


s*_ 


-4«i 


Z21~^~" 


ISKZZZSIS«r 


I  « 


-*r»" 


-h 


7 


-■sffl 


ISE 


311 


s= 


4r*~ 


^=iji=SK 


n    n_o      rn    n    __ 


!f 


rr 


I2H 


W 


SB! 


/ 


n ,  j-1   n 


!"»• 


*£—#&* 


T==F: 


3. 


LJ  i 


3 


If 


#r*— a»— eW 


P 


SEiEai 


4^" 


«p: 


-ax#- 


:qk: 


£ 


~gg~ 


¥ 

i 

it 


_&== 


3S_ 


■1-0- 


7 


-e# 


3#_ 


I  ,,_!    J  ,'  i     i 


F 

Barr6. 


? 


-41. 


-*_*£ 


— T — T^--^-^=======^r-iaf2 

J ZI31 _r Zj —?r 4-* —      3e3       ~p~ 


F 


■P  -js^ 


"3F 


IB 


G2 


CARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR 


Scales,  Cadences,  Exercises,  and  Preludes, 

in  the  Major  and  Minor  Keys,  which  have  not  been  presented 
in  the  First  Part. 


Key  of  B  Minor. 

1st  Poa. 


Gamines,  Cadences,  Exerciccs  ct  Preludes, 

dans  les  tons  majeurs  et  mineurs  qui  n'ont  point  ete  fMnentfs 
dans  la  premiere  Partie. 


4th  Pos.  . 


2d  Poi. 


Ton  de  Si  Mincur. 


Scale. 


±zfzl 


e 


^jp^f 


Szt 


■•-^-43x=rP--t^txz^-» 


i — r 


1 zr_czc. 


-^W- 


~sr- 


m^m 


Cadence. 


2d  Poi.        lat. 
J 


2d. 


?$ 


—IS' — ctS^i -J 


r 


Hf- 


IitPoa. 


Exercise.  Sfrc-S-G- i»»« — : 


#—?: 


*  5?I 


i 


■?#■ 


ppffillglJiliS 


Prelndc. 


zfci: 


'i    i    r 

2d  Pos. 


*=?: 


jii1 


"«QF3"  -*ln 


*#*? 


pp^^ipg^l 


gr.  barre. 


F 


1st  Pos. 


"^1      -«-         ^  ^      ii  ^      B"  "»■«  ist  ros. 

«../■■©■  -i-      W  "-*1      -3  ^     J-       D,m.    y      :z?  'n? 


mf  p  7* 

gr.  barre. 


■gT  Dim. 


Scale 


"   1 


Key  of  F  #  Minor. 


f  v      r 

Ton  de  Fa  #  Mincnr. 


*=e= 


l^i^^^iissiiliip 


2d  Pon 

gr.  barre. 


fff 


4th  Pos.         2d  Pos. 


Ihereisc.  /^B- 


i-p-       ^     '-(S>- 


4* — 


^-ff^^S 


^^^^S^S 


^iP^^^^fP 


CARCASSI'8    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR. 


63 


Prelude. 


2d  Pol.  4th  P°i. 

pelit  barre.  gf-  barre.  2d  Pol. 


^ 


¥ 


2d  Poa.  gr.  barr 


lit  f9a.  4th  Pot.  gr.  barre.  2d  Fob.  gr.  barre. 

1  '  '  3  I  8  '  1?" 

4  4  I 


Scale. 


Key  of  C  *f  Miiienr. 

lat  Poa.  6th  Poh. 


Ton  d'Ut  #  Minenr. 

l8t   I '08. 


Cadence. 


4th  Poi.      2d  Poa.        4th  Pos. 
gr.  barre. 

-*3 3  ?3 W 1 n?J 4© 


=s«s^ 


s 


r 


p-j-arg — e^g-h-i 


r 


Exercise.  gfi-S— -Q — ■ —  ^j^^ — j- 

SJ2  r^__n_#ZZZl_ 


=& 


g3E£gs£i 


ep=^=&^ 


^^Se^Se^ 


utr* 


=8=*: 


^-tiff1^ 


^b=T= 


S^^Fr* 


— tfsE — H 

3-jS>- 


4lh  Pos. 


r#r* 


|     J  ■  i     i    i     i«i_  i i     I    . 


1st  Poa-  pet.  barre. 

I      I 


Preladet, 


t#r* 


u    ilj.il       1  S       I  I        _S I 

—  RIP i=-S « 


i-F-3" 


rs-r 


4th  Poa  gr.  barre. 


I 1    I  0    L_    I    i \-d—\ |- 


i '  i    i 


i*S^ 


^*Z5^ --»+ 


=P 


lat  Poa. 


*=<H 


^S 


:hee*J: 


t 


1     i    r 


-P; 


?=E=i 


J— !_«__!■_ 


I  0     i 
-i_tjI7T 


f- 


4th  Pos. 

n 


re?" 


1st  Pos.  pet.  barre. 


3d  Pot.  gr.  barre. 


4th  Pos.  gr.  barre. 


Hfe* 


*± 


BgJggg- 


T33=n.jara 


-(?"• 


1    '   If   1   ! 


4-4-N-4-4- 


T 


!-•—•-■ 


ns>: 


1 


«# 


•P- 


F- 


G4 


CARCASSt'S     INSTRUCTIONS    FOB    THE    SUITAK 


Gamut.    K  ^*^& 


Gamut  in  B  Major. 

1st  Pos. 

4=*B 


Ton  de  Si  DIajeur. 


w 


m 


■o    * 


»  +  *  r.-f2-  -r  •  ,+-* 


sg^g 


~~r~  1 1  .  :  r r 


2d  Pos.  1st  Pos.         2d  Pos. 


Cadence.  IgEiEziiEFEf 


gj «y_U^E=gEp^ 


ssi  B 


T" 


ap         rrasa: 


±Z2^= 


^i 


1st  Pos. 


Exercise,  fe  ff'^pF 


m 


g  i  /it]  .r^g^^^ 


4th   Pos. 

0 


#=^ 


:G*£ 


£^ 


tfcffa 


1st  Pos 


as 


I  I 


2d  Pos. 


1st  Pos. 


*HB 


1st  Pos. 


Hfc* 


?5E* 


2d  Pos. 


^3 


■     j£S^ 


i 


1st  Pos. 


^=^    F  :r< 


1-*-^#-4-#— +# « — #- l-J-o-J^*-*^ 


G  Sharp  Minor. 


Ton  de  Sol  #  lHineir. 


Cadence.  jpb^=|g===Ig 


4th  Pos. 

P-  ba>T«.  ut  Pos.  4th  Pos. 

1^ *gj-  lgj  4  J  1,    ' 


-^«S- 


*F" 


f9-  "^ 


m 


w 


CARCASSl'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR. 


«5 


ist  Poa. 


Exercise,  fe^ 


m  |  jijjri^J^^g^n-'J^^feE^e 


<fe^S?> 


I^J^JjTlljTiiJISl^  ^jiJSJU^pt 


4th   Pos. 
petit  barre". 


Prelude. 


i5r#- 


saa 


4th  Pos.     petit  Barre.  1ft  Pos. 


4th  Pos.  gr.  barre. 


4tn  ros.     pent  Barre.  m  ros.  *io  jtos.  gr.  uarre.  ^^ 


t      r 


4th  Pos.  gr.  Barre. 


sag^s 


ffl^^^^S^H 


H 


W 


W 


i 


Hey  of  F#  Major. 


Ton  d  Fa  *  Majenr. 


Serving  also  for  that  of  Gb  Major,  with  six  flats.  j       Servant  aussi  pour  celui  de  Sol  hemol  majeur  avec  fix  Bemols 

1st  Pos. 


Gamut.  jgigggBE 


ft* 


^rmrrTF^s 


3^11 


M 


2d  Pos. 


Cadence,  ft-*  VTHg^ 


-J- 


jg^ig- j 


4th  Poa.        2d  Poa. 
gr.  Barre. 

u1l_ 


3E 


^ 


rpr         «js>"  *&- 


*P" 


1st  Pos. 


Exercise.  fc5=z§ziz 


HG 


OABCASSI'S     INSTRUCTIONS     FOB    THfi    GUITAR. 


2d  Pos. 

petit  barre. 


fe*S=£: 


Prelnde.  &ES& 


WMMMMM 

>■* *r -* 1  -+- 1 


4th  Pos. 

gr :  barre. 


3 


2d  Pos.     petit  barre 


i*s^ 


11  oarre  I   p# 


r*r*. 


4th  Poa.  gr:  barre 

"33 


#=*=*£* 


p=p  esq  p?q 


6th  Poa. 


— 1*— *f    ■  I       ~f- 


i 


S 


4th  Pos. 


:#:*-( 


2d  Poa.    petit  barre.  4th  Pos.  gr:  barre.     2d  Pos. 


4  petit  barre.'^gr:  barre. 


*2 


Gam«t.&=#iS 


5*=e 


Key  of  D#  Minor. 


Ton  De  Rett  Mhieur. 


33 


-  t*em  PTT-rf- 


4 


m 


sr 


m 


Cadence,  ^^g^; 


gztzz^Et 


~rr 


4S: 


E2£ 


35?. 


SSI 


last 


.^    ^r 


^E 


1st  Pos. 


■taeniae 


ise.  ^^^^----^---45^^^^ 


r*=P= 


-=3^^§i3i^=ppp 


i 


fgE=Eig=ggg 


^i 


W- 


4th  Pos. 


:ms= 


-r^ 1^ 

i  i 


m\ 


3d  Pos 

Prelnde.  IX^S^ 


1st  Poa. 


3d  Pos. 


2d 


4th  Poa.   petit  bnrre. 


r  "•  '«*"<»■  2d  Pos.  


1st  roa.  gr:  bnrre. 


-fS1- 


4th  Poa.  gr:  barr<5. 


lat  Pos.  4th  Pos. 


iijp^P^ppi 


CARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR. 

Key  of  Bb  Major.  !  Ton  de  Sib  Majeur. 


6? 


latPoa. 


daunt.  Jk£-W 


ES 


^— *~ 


^P» 


lit  Pa*,  gr:  bans'. 


Cadence.  jjjJiV,     iJ= iksfcg 


i 


t«i- 


g^jl^^ff 


T" 


T^ 


1st  Fos. 


Exeieise.  /fefe^Hg 


pggMasg^ggg^j j  ifi|  rrri  ,  iJg|p^pi 


lit  Pos. 


3d  Poa.  gr:  barre. 


tat  Poa. 


Prelnde.    jtb—ki^ 


& 


r3 


r 


^ 


«t±t 


2^ 


eg 


*2 — +z^  + 


*4tp 


3d  Pob  gr:  barre. 

- 


P 


*-• 


I 


#-«-- 


^ 


r*2  < 


35 


-at    5         -# 


1PT 


Ig-    - ^s^a 

:   latPoa.  i 


32Z 


Hey  of  G  Minor. 


3d  Poa.  TS^ 

6th  Poa.  gr:  barre. 

Ton  De  Sol  Mineur. 


tiamut.  j^— (a.- 


^ptttf* 


m 


a=± 


=S±P#: 


i 


e^tb 


S 


* 


S?f 


PI 


3d  Poa.  gi .:  barre.  2d  Poa. 


3d  Poa. 


w.^.  if5i'%=ii==ig^=^^jfe-  ! ;: 


3g= 


I 


lat  Poa. 


Rxereise.  fcj— gT 


-i    r 


■^nr*^- 


:gj=«i 


**=3=iH 


p^iipifefg 


frrr  r  rTr^-J  J  '  J  J_J^£E£gg^^ 


ffito*-J   A 


-S—&- 


m 


T~F 


HH 


CARCASSI'S     INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    9UITAR. 

Sd  Poa.  petit  Barre. 


Prelude,  feb- 


Sd  r«.  petit  Barre. 


gr,  Barre.  lit  Pot. 


*K 


&t 


•-4 «. 


M  Poa. 


2d  Poa.  ut  Poa. 


\mfo*       • 


lP" 


^ 


4 # 


^^ 


3d  Poa 


g^ 


Key  of  Eh  Major. 


*±afc 


TCt  Barre.  iiS 


m 


lat  Poa. 


K 


•    .7T 


? 


* 


3d  Poa. 


Ton  de  Mi  b  Majcnr. 

5    ■*-!     i        sdPos. 


^-B-f-j==^|jggEg 


gg=g; 


1     i     -<S-    »      l        .  Sd  Pe 


$ 


si 


MPoa.  4th  P™.  8d  Poa.  I„  Po..         M  pM 


Cadence.  -#-r-k_!i; 


I^^^B 


P 


tS r>-f- 


-M 


2^r 


gr.  Barre1 


m 


Exercise,  fety^ 


lat  Poa. 

ft p*| 


^^P^P^^^^^^^^ 


&C 


^piiSliS 


^^* 


m 


Sd  Poa 


zrfc 


Prelndc.  JtbuC     H«q^=jE 
W         *p-a-»— * — i 

lat  Poa.  gr.  Burro. 

m  n 


o_ 


r 


-a-**  — Hi 


J~"l       l«t  Poa.  I— I 


5S 


T=»" 


S 


SdPoa. 


ii       J     L 


T^- 


s 


petit  Barre 

-22  fflq 


I  I  I  I  !  I  ~£?~P-  Barre.  i  I*  P 


d'amnt. 


Key  ©f  C  Minor. 


•fe^^^-^si 


r^f- 


tW *~ 1 r- 


ion 

is*? 


Ton  D'nt  Mincnr. 

>3 


£ 


gf 


OARCASSI'S     INSTRUCTIONS     FOR    THE    GUITAR. 


«9 


Id  Tot.  lit  Pos.        8d  Pim 


b gg£ 


Cadence,  fe-he-fg  ^ 


r 


r?^: 


J- 


-30 


iS^ 


3S 


:4S= 


^f 


*T 


1st  Pos. 


Exercise. 


^ppEgH^E^^^jg^  I  j  j  j  j^psj 


§£ 


g^n4^ 


sg 


=*^-b»- 


Stei^ 


JW 


STi^TF 


^--^T1 


-*-^Jr 


r  r 


3d  Pos. 


Prelum.  E^g 


K=£S 


t=tf 


E 


lit  Pim.  petit  Itarrs. 

I   'I 


3d  Poa. 


r    r  r 


±±jizM 


*=3 


r  r    **? 


#P?1|    S^IEe 


£ 


£^ 


r     r    r  r 


r  r  r  t  r  r   r 


Key  of  Ab  Major. 

1st  Pos, 


Ton  de  lab  IHajenr. 


t^= 


Gamut.    /fckV^ 


wm 


#  P  ,-p-  F _^ 


i 


P^ 


3J-g 


Ifl 


*-* 


4th  Pos. 


?M^ 


rat 


***■ 


1st  Pos.       4th  Pos. 


Cadence,  Sfeb^zfezaS 


Ejj=Rg 


a.o  ■ 


T- 


I 


r 

gr.  barri. 


lit  Pos, 


Exercise.  jfeE^g 


^^^zm 


*$-- 


&fa 


JO 


CARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS     FOE    THE    GUITAR 
4th  Pos.  pet:  barre1.        6th.  Pos.  gr :  ban-a.       4th.  Pos. 


rre.nde./O-^ 


4th  ros.  pet:  barre.        6th.  Fos.  gr :  ban-a.       4th.  Pos. 

H^;  v-tTi     HP  «Hi  I  i     fn  -•-  i  R     naV-n-i     __  sze  ^  poS.      ,  — 


1-    P..  __^_  ..        *  «*■  P»».        I        I        ,--  4<1>-  POI. 

'»  'i  *  &  h         5 


n- 


1st  Pos. 


Key  of  F  Minor. 


Gamnt.     cg^r-© 


Ton  De  Fa  Minenr. 

I     i 


3=. 


'mmmmmmmmm 


1st.  Pos. 


^3§^fllF 


Cadence 


>-IJfe=f: 


-a-eF 


rss: 


-J, 


HE^TS1 


:^a 


Ss: 


•i» 


-*-©l 


es>- 


*33 rr 


1st.  Pos. 


:3zn-~gtT-'y rr 

9 — r^P—tt 


petit  barre 


^5 


petit  barre. 


Prelude.  fefife£fi— Tf1*11 


' BgSZZt 


fe 


r 


«h.  Pos.  p:  barre.  Ut.  Pot 

-HP- 


3—TB 


5= 


r^ 


;-i 


F 


Key  of  Db  Major. 

Swring  also  for  that  of  C#  Major,  with  seven  sharp. 


Ton  Dc  Rcb  Majcnr. 

Servant  aussi  pour  celui  d'Ut  #  majeur  avec  sept  diese*. 


BuwtJMge^^E: 


Ith  Pos.  M.  Pos.  i(t  Pas  '•■>  •»«- 


Cadence,  p-fai^- 

^  ipr 


*F 


I23Z: 


TBT 


¥i& 


CARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR. 


71 


lit.  Po». 


lercise. 


lit.  ra&.    ^rf^rr__l_    —  m-    - 


J  *  -»-  :J:  #     :*^ 


lsl.  Pos.  petit  barre. 


F— -       5C 

wn^      ^^m     1st.  Pos.  gr:  barre. 


-£&T 


7? 


5 
ii 


_ ,    t,  1st.  Pos.  _._-■       -_ i— 

_  ^m      ==S    WP       rT^      S3R    C=a  gr:  barre.     r-P^    FT11 


pet:  barre, 


i 


3— rP 


Key  of  Bb  Minor. 


i 

i 


tffi?i 


'» n? —  — 

"T — — 1~~ #. 


.    id 
-^-  j  _^C  9tb.  Pos. 


5. 


CS3E 


T~25 

gr:  barre. 


Ton  de  sib  Mincnr. 


Sd.  Pos. 


tamnt.febj5_-T-e: 


1st   Pos. 


r=l — ta 

as*! 


sit 


M-bS  l 


.^ 


~ST' 


t&S=^=m 


lit.  Pol.  gr:  barre 

J ad- 


Cadence.  feEfcEfez±J~ t^— :  J 


gl=±^k 


W 


7? 


*f    T~T 


:25s: 


^gt 


1"?5 


I 


±=g: 


1st.  Pos.  ^^ 0- 


3=* 


:F=£i*i 


±S 


gr:  barre 


Prelnde.|^|q£g^jp| 


x?3 


"#~      TT      "»" 

I  I  I 


^      ^   3d.  Pos. 
-a-     -J-   i-»-  -•-     ■#-     —  — r     ~T    T»"  «r      » 


•*"      TT    IT" 

I        I 


T     T» 

7-  F  ' 


gr:  barre.  ^^^  gr:  barre1. 


h  i-j. — SC-^ — i— !— H r-FPJS? -H-3 -Y^r^r^— TH— |-*trS 

33     ^  tj  a      q=  4  ^      35  r 

(  M.  Pos       j  |        ^T  1st.  Pos.    "<#"      "V"      ".*"  ",*"      "T         1 


fk^k^y^^- 


Sinful 


r    T   f 


_r   _^. 


72 


OARCASSI'S     INSTRUCTIONS     FOR    T  H  A    GUITAR 


Harmonics. 

Harmonics  are  produced  by  placing  a  finger  of  the  left  hand 
across  all  the  strings  of  the  Guitar  at  certa'n  divisions  of  the 
finger  board. 

The  finger  must  press  lightly,  yet  with  sufficient  force  to 
prevent  the  string  from  vibrating  as  if  open.  As  soon  as  the 
string  has  been  struck  with  sufficient  force  near  to  the  bridge, 
the  finger  must  be  taken  off. 

Harmonics  sound  an  octave  higher  than  what  they  are 
marked.  They  are  produced  at  the  12th,  7th,  5th,  4th  and  3d 
fret,  as  the  following  table  shows. 


Sons  Harmoniques. 

On  produit  les  sons  harmoniques  en  posant  un  doigt  e  li 
main  gauche  sur  toutes  les  cordes  de  la  Guitare  a  de  cei  jines 
divisions  seulement.  II  faut  que  le  doigt  pose  legerement  maij 
avec  assez  de  force  pour  empecher  a  corde  de  resonner  a  vide, 
et  on  leve  ce  doigt  aussitot  apses  avoir  pince  la  corde  un  peu 
fort  pres  du  Chevalet. 

Les  sons  harmoniques  rendent  une  octave  au  dessus  ce  ce 
qu'ils  sont  marques.  lis  se  font  a  la  12me,  7me,  5me.  4me  e< 
3me  touche  comme  le  demontre  le  tableau  suivant. 


■M  String. 
Ira  Corde. 


2J  String. 
2e  Corde. 


EJ  String. 
8e  Corde. 


4th  String. 
4e  Corde. 


6th  String. 
Be  Corde. 


6th  String. 
8e  Corde. 


12th  Fret, 
12me  Tooche. 


m 


7th  Frot. 

7roe  Tooche. 


-ftg- 


6th  Fret. 
6me  Touche. 


w 


£ 


4th  Fret. 
4m  e  Toncbe. 


a 


#ts- 


3&zr 


-JSSz 


8d  Fret 

3ir;e  Tooche. 


-f2. 


m 


Exercise  in  Harmonics.  Exercice  en  sons  Harmoniqncs. 

The  upper  figures  point  out  the  frets,  and  the  lower  ones  the         Les  chiffres  superieurs  indiquent  les  touches  et    es  cr  tfrw 
wrings. 

Allegretto.^-^ — jy 


3        3        3        4  .1        5"" "S 


5 6        3        6 


3        4        6        4  3        6        6        fl  4        -       Z       T^T 


*         0    -       -    3  0        4        6        4  6        3        4        fl 


£=&=r- 


m 


t        12      7      12      5 


12    - 


#01 


S        5        3        5  1464 


3        B        fl        fl 


4 


mT7"i i  ;■ ,  i,  i ^m*i 


3        2         13 


14        2 


OARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR. 


i       -  1 

7 


7     12      6 


I F — 0 0 *■ 


5 


-    18 


1 


pr-^ 


s 


1 


7  7        1 

r-F- 


3  8       3       3       4 

3  7    -      -       12 


3        2 


6 

-ft- 


73 

12 


s 


All  the  notes  within  the  compass  of  the  Guitar  may  be 
played  harmonically. 

To  do  this  the  note  which  is  to  be  played  harmonically  is 
fingered  in  the  same  manner  as  an  ordinary  note ;  then  the 
point  of  the  forefinger  of  the  right  hand  is  placed  at  the  12th 
fret  distant  from  the  note  which  before  has  been  fingered  by  the 
left  hand,  the  thumb  is  then  removed  from  the  forefinger,  which 
presses  lightly  on  the  string,  and  strikes  this  string  which  will 
produce  a  harmonic  sound. 

J2 


Allegretto.  fezS 


j  a     -      -   7  x  a        o        _m  ±a         i 


On  peut  aussi  executer  en  sons  harmoniques  toutes  les  notes 
du  Diapason  de  la  Guitare. 

Pour  y  parvenir,  on  doigte  avec  la  main  gauche  la  note  qu'on 
veut  rendre  harmcnique,  comme  si  l'on  devait  executer  une 
note  ordinaire,  puis  l'on  pose  le  bout  de  l'index  de  la  main 
droite  a  la  12me  touche  correspondante  de  la  note  doigtee 
par  la  main  gauche,  en  ecartant  le  pouce  de  l'index  qui  pose 
legerement  sur  la  corde,  on  pincera  cette  corde  qui  resonnera 
harmoniquement. 

12  7    13 


4   32432  +  3234  2  34       13     834   324324   '»  83     234       24 

7  12     7      12  12  7        7 


-#T 


=Fs 


gmrre 


7  12  7      12 7  12         fi       m-f-m        1?        .  7i      n     r^r-2! 


4  3243     2     4        323423        4 

5     ,     .". 


.    ,,12Fi,-12 |_  7    12      7  12  &    7   1 2      7    f-  f  -1 2  %JU*1     «18 ^.i-li    Z     'li^j 

t7       « TT      l  a     «     I         a  1  3     2     1         2      1  1  3212  1323     2      1 


3  2        1  3     2     12 


6th  String.         5th. 
6e  Corde. 


1  32121  1  3218 

4th.  Sd.  2d  (si- 


Position  of  the  left  hand. 


¥ 


=^EE3 


m 


Position  de  la  main  gauche. 


Place  where  the  1st  finger  of  ~g 
the  right  hand  must  successive-  (gp 
Iv  be  played.  ^I2th  Fret       isth. 

12e  Touche. 

Rondo  to  exercise  all  the  Positions. 


J^=I 


Place    ou  doit   poser  sueces- 
sirement  l'index  de  la  main 


14th. 


12th.  13th. 


12th.         droite. 


■•fa»'|Nipgg7^ .  tb=^=l 


Rondeau  poor  exerccr  tontes  les  Positions. 

6th  div. 

5me  case. ■ 

i       ctsj     i  j^_       _    .  rm-J-  -J-  ■*-  -*'- 


BmsB^m 


7  4 


^r- 


CARCASSTS    INSTRUCTIONS     FOR    THE    GUITAR. 
"■^'    ;        l     "i      ■     i      r 


_« I 


\m i 


lenzzzai 


£ 


^^te^^==^?EEE? 


S-Uii, 


=tfr 


-f 


f— «- 


. '3™^  i       i     ^^-3 1 1 — -j 


J__#__ 

&3 


I 


T— I 


TT-^f-P = 

8d  div. 

Smc  case 


■rH         f" 


^^^E^Efe^=^M=^ 


r 


r^ 


3 


:EIEfEE^ 


^ 


3d  div. 

_l_ I fe      ,     1  1        m  1  1  phb  >_*«>  ^—  Sme  case. 


.e*= 


■/>  £  V   ~3 


7t.h  div. 
7me  case.  ■ 


f         f 


r  r  T+ 


^  3d  div. 

case. 


^==rP=r^EE=FEEE3^EEEEpEEEE^L=_EE£^EEE^fe_    ' 


7th  div. 
7me  case.  > 


?~S" 


F- 


:f=rezz»*; 


-1     «{-- 


J"J.  ^  1    r^-,- 


jf—9- 


-i-^-^ 


wmm^. 


it]  r*i£ 


( — 


H* „ p 


1 i= ^^*u3^ 


-F_:p=ai: 


:^g^^=r-— ^~ JJ- 


1 — 


FS** 


EEEEi: 


-f- 


I 


'  ?        F*  ■     tip      y  r  r  rT    f 


— P — *_  rt 


-r         »     1     -f      p p 1 1 p — l#_ p_zn — - 

1  *   I  5 


-4-t-.. 

Hnjo 


OARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR. 


75 


Mdiv. 


-J == 


f 


i  .r 


iff 


i 


i 

m  a  tempo 


I  I 


opo 


n — i 
.to? 
i"      i"      *      "_  *i 

T  T 


i 


i 


-f-H--,1- 

-  9 1 — m 


rallCMtando., 


/ 


J=s=« 


^rr-r-£tEnrt>t 


1 


5th  div. 
6me  case.* 


4th  div.  5th  div. 

-  4me  case. 5me  case.< 


:azi*~s: 


-•>-.  .* 


:F #p _F ^ — 


li 


£jja _j 


i 


v-w-i- 


^=F* 


s/Z 


i  div 


9th  div. 
9me  case 


*--, 


~#s 


i 


1 


^Sfeii§ 


^.  :•:  V 


Ml 


JL       I 
t_ 


3=i= 


i 


*=*- 


PF5V3-     ..  1 


7th  div. 
7me  case. 

4 


6th  div. 
5me  case. 


F 

4th  div. 
4nre  case. 


r 


^ 


EEE~lf 


=FF 


■f-d 


ffi 


T~\    \    \    r 


T-K 


9th  div. 
9 me  case.- 


#7*- 


gy 


as 


7th  div.  6th  div.  4th  div. 

7me  case.  5me  case.  4me  case. 


m^. 


:er 


76 


* — # 


^ARCASSI'S     INSTRUCTIONS     FOR    THE    GUITAR 

-j— j_4-j_|^l 1 ! — Eg    i jfcj^ 


p   r   r 


* — # — • 


# — • — # 


•  5   7  r 


^S^ 


5  th  div. 


j.    ./    ^    v    ^    v 


7th  div.- 


P 


=ir-n-Fh 


g^£J&j^  f  f  |  g  rj j— £*  t« 


7      T  c 


£=fc 


jf^^ 


r 


-  7? 


i 


S 


-* — r 


?" 


div: 


^_^ * *__ 


*?- 


~Z     i     r 


-# • — t 


^ 


3EE$E 


H 


a p 


3^a^=-j=^^ 


^=^-i  j  =  .a 


t*     7     r 

3d  div  , 


r^3^ 


U    f    r 


g-g-l  ■  r  «  r  !  r_#  r.  t 


s 


:J=£3^3 


3S 


T      ^ 


* — • — #- 


"t^f=^^ 


±    3*-    1*- 


wmm 


p= 


# — •- 


f    f    f     v 


^PF^ 


y-  l.      -.#-      i  n       Sth  div, r 


i — 


i  L— 


8th  div : 


1 


^U^^U- 


u 


,     I     I     I     I  J       J\     I 


CARCASSI'S    INSTKUCTI0N8    FOR    THE    GUITAB. 


ri 


THIRD    PART. 


TROISIEME    PJRTIE. 


59  Exercises  Progressing  in  Difficulty. 

A  mlnnlino  i;ni7  0*o. 


K*    I. 


JiS 


£^ 


id  i; 


0  _  0       m m 


Cinquante  morceanx  progressifs. 


iBS 


«* 


I 


0 0— 1-0 0 0 


-0    4    0 • 


0 8-    0    4 


* 0 


irr 


p^T    f    -P- 


r 


r 


s 


i 


^ 


^-Cr"^/^t=FT 


-• — # 


S 


5 


• — # 


r— f 


n».  2.  .    a 


Waltz. 


5ffl^i=p£p-:k=p^l 


SS 


S=S 


F=f **? 


^ 


r^ 


T 


f 


•0-fSwm. 

I 


^f=^PT'tr=^^rrW 


ET 


r    7 


=J=tj 


3g= 


iii      i 


^ 


H 


«=t3t 


*±t 


^= 


S 


^f 


^ 


^ 


vr    j-  = 


mf 


T 


5^^— r — h 
3C 


sgs 


8H 


m 


m 


as 


•? 


f  -     p  i 


zjj.  V  "   *c-CJ^  r 


^T 


p  -  « 


i=edE=Eg 


tef 


a 


ift 

I>.  c 


-r    ~t~  f 


cU"  r      tU 


*     » 


r-A-cJ-f-e-cJi^ 


JS 


OARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUlihil 


i— J— J-^ 


rTfTfTT 


312— 


tP 


y=3^ 


-a#- 


ag  ua^tar 


S^Jg3 


^sa 


fTrj^rrt::F-=^ 


^ 


B*^8™^**1 


w^Ms- 


■==4* 


i 


j^P^  i  ffi#.  ^  i  j  ,  nn  i  j  ,  ^^jspi 


f^^lSf^^T 


» 


?» 


s 


*«^ — *^ 


& 


Ld± 


»&=P 


2  *-g — rg-re 


LJ" 


S 


Sf^W^^ 


abfcS 


^ 


ft  pin. 


Allegretto. 


*s  ~ZJe  I        *      ail -m.   -*.  f    *         9^ W- 


ism^tiQ 


^f  f?  '  r:i"  r  -r->  ?1?  '>  f?»-' 


f1         -f-r  ~  -»-r  ! -P  Pi  I  I  I         h       !  " 


r-^j 


rr  f  '  pr^r  V  *  Lyf~-t/r"^  j  rcr ' 


3AKCASSI'S    1NSTBUCTI0NS    FOR    THE    GD1TAB. 


79 


Wall*.  fer-f-S-ii „.    J      .        a/_—     *  3b 


:.*L#J!i*Lia«L 


^SB=igI 


a-s v^gag 


1 


=p£ 


-al t— ar- 


se     — g- 


i     i     i 


"*it 


-a  -  -a  -  * , 


i»~  i    •*==?* 


C--J-    ^    5? 


7/i      V 


^= 


r     r     r 


* ^ — _ _ — ^ a — 


ibfc--j 


,  tui 


•-    r 


^ 


S5£- 


"~E3T& 


P^gggllgl 


^ 


gp^sr&'terfe 


a 


**« 


D.  C.  S 

m 


3=g3^=£s=s^S^ 


*T*++-t 


%    -J-&\£ 


^^^5 


itl 


^fe±£=S 


I 


at 


— '  "     1  — ' 


NT    r 


as 


&=&=t=3s. 


-r^-J^h 


r^^^r^-y-f 


T 


fk^ 


r 


T^T 


811 


-#. 


a 


Waltz.  p^E^: 


R» 


a*_ 

-3 #-+»»# 


CARUASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR 

MIES 


J  — r 3 J — 1 


=F 


|^=*fgEEEllH 


mf+ 


-»-       -#- 


c#z*- 


/: 


S^ 


:-^= 


3#" 


3t±3t=t* 


^ 


ii&i 


Minor. 


^J^S 


r 


=h 


S 


=S=*?= 


3e^^I 


J> 


-r* 


"r 


"r 


Allegretto. 


«..  8.  S&F^ 


s 


^EiESMi 


-i — js 


3^S^§ 


.^  J-    J^b^toJ—* 


3=*= «= 


r  »»/^^  -»-  -e- 


i  i 


"r 


-is-' 


3F=£ 


-fazj       /       1^ 


!S£1 


^F^=^LFg^i_j:^rFg3==g^: 


'     F 


Ff- 


IS-- 

I 


^3^3^^^^E^^^^^||af^gfaSJjg 


^ 


T9" 


fT 


V 


!feS=S?EIE±g 


^ 


_;_NT_jpr3H^T-rr3-^-^T^^S^'^- 


r 


j-i-f — ^- 


a 


-&* 


Anilnnio 


=3=? 


fS 


Li^  "T 


a 


g 


^==^=st 


1/ 


^^E^ 


EFWW 


^d-^—J-^-rd- 


wfc 


§ 


cfrMifcB 


r^±=S: 


3^3= 


jj  ■■"' 


Iff 


e^3; 


ii— #- 


•3=*-* 


t 


j.* 


7    »r 


ft      SUt 


CARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR. 


HI 


IVo.  10. 


^ p- 


#zfai=^i=  ^fer —  g=i^ 


=*!= 

zfc 


&=M 


jzk 


P 


mf*f 


S 


^ 


S 


§*- 


s 


3=1 


r 


nfc*: 


r 


i^f 


£* 


^U^ 


^S 


I  FIB. 


Si 


"»/? 


IP 


«/■' 


*•- 


li^ 


s;^ 


J^ 


W 


I-Jr- 


HT^ 


-^-^-H-t-F^3^3-t-H=v'^3-t-*1 » 

— r  W'  3»"  I  ■-   li.    C 


No. 


"•tip 


-*« 


-r      -r 


f\, 


m 


1 .  *  ## -  :zz      — — ; 


r 


£==^1=^1 


P^f 


<#•■ 


^3=e 


:?t=s« 


* — -f 


§!5riz=^S=iS5: 


fg=pg 


r 


'-f^ — r=j=t-r-*r — *    i    ±4= -—  ^3^ --* — 


ssag. 


3= 


Ff 


atA: 


-#-      Fi» 


-V ^8 


-  Barre 


82  CABOASSI'S     INSTRUCTIONS     FOR    THE    GUITAR. 

A.LI.EORETTO. 

"ft*-* 

N*.  12.  ant 


RETTo.g  r-r:  j  __  ,  r*r?   j    r  j    r*   i    r   i  ^^_      ^   ; 

sran__ s=L_ ztr_ j_ — — — jji- : =s=l 

' u  r-      u  r-  p.  r-      u  F •      "- 


S^^eJ 


^^jtegrg^fe-^^^^ 


F' 


r 


m/ 


r  r-  r- 


"»• 


?-• 


y^j^jd^ilgrii^aMiii 


r- 


r-  r-  r- 


?r- 


r 


^ 


bfr-* — 


•    a       jig=         «=  — =L—_ e-  tW_=is_— :  t»~ — g-8— Eg 5Eg—  a 


r 


r- 


r* 


"S^- 


g^ 


r- 


f   \  °c- 


Allegretto  non  troppo. 


h 


-g—- »— r— — — rnrf- 


«-4^=±=^tm^=^ 


at=r=5g 


rn  *& 


^'^T^fWfW^ •     & 


CARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR. 


S3 


ASDAirrimo 


N#.  i4.ifc? 


/ 


£f 


_ 


=3=3=3      i — 3 


t 


:P?=t=^; 


I  TT 


i±H 


:sp: 


-i — i p 


MP" 


:^L 


^=t 


"S 


^ 


5T_^Z~  ~ 


i  r 


:sz?:r»: 


^: 


«=p^::=l=pr=f 


3^»" 


1 


3» 


3»" 


:pff=* 


-f^f»—P 


2wr 


n 31 


:^T" 


d    i 


/-r 


I 


s&l 


w\^=-     r      ==-  -|»-rT       -?-  \ar\    , 


G4 


~j 


ii 


FINK, 


IS 


i 

i 


T 


EX 


IV  o.  15. 
Waltz. 


-,— — 

H       I   i  F   I 

-Hd 


-*•— I — • — Pi: 


rTTTT 
-M-J-f-M- 


— i  ■  I      I     !   " 
I     )_• I  _! L 


"1 — r  — \^r  , 


* — f— 


5^1 


^    • i 


3»" 


I    I    I    I 


I      I       I      !■ 


3—1  I  ■  ~  I  I  — 


sm^S 


■**? 


i  *_ 


^ 


3      1-'-  i 


=3, 


I   J      l_   L_! , 1 


L 


T 


3 


84 


OARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR 


Ne.  iH. 
Caprice.  SJIifc 


18-Jfj,    =^g^^==y=^=^^^^M^  "J  SEES 


r 


"!ig 


— r* —      V        >ffh*y^_   g^       — 


gr.  Barre. 


^^^P^^g^^^ 


3 

r 


r 


^m^^^m^m^^^^m^m^ 


■f* 


mf 


¥ 


T 


mmmMcmmm^m^mmm^ 


-#. i# 


r     T 


r        r 


■!=»- 


-ff^^: 


-*— *- 


r 


=3^ 


p — 

I    Dim. 


B 


S 


m 


~* — Ml 


r 


IRbII. 


-sJ- 


"T 


mi 


No. 
March. 


ARCASSI'S     INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR 


85 


^fefe^tt^^fefe^^ 


f      f    T 


r 


7=" 


T 


/ 


rffrT^f — p —  r      i     /Trfr 


^u^^.i^^S 


•*3-Fg==?i^!^i 


"F    f  *  ~r 


T 


llSf 


ia=*2s» 


i  ^     i 


-iS>- 


1 


^ 


^*J=fj 


^z^fizigg 


I 


•"/ 


s??  r  "^tfiT^  ~r 


^ 


r  r        r 


-f 


r 


'7^~r 


r 


r     r 


Hf 


r 


,h  o«iaii«e. 


fc=]3 


1*'».  18.  ferfizf: 


mf 


^T 


*/&-    == ftS^ V51 .— ? 


=P5 


n.-^1^ 


*±=*± 


gr.  Barre. 


ZI 


r 


# — # 


5=*  y    -I 


„_  j a o « ■ * — i 


-i?3- 


^S 


^±==t=±^=^^^=t^-==r 


■u  S| 


-f^^— *-' 


^gf^i 


"p 


^r^r 


-J-j-g-^- 


-*=>- 


-■!-» W-+. 


s 


ja 


r 


# *- 


"^ 


« # 


i 


it 


#-3- 


r       f 


i 


U 


w=^= 


"^p  Cm 


*±rd=»t 


3t± K 


2^3 


^^  * 


-r 


nr 


ffi^ 


*=* 


« — #- 


JTI 


T±" 


I 


Mi 


CARCASSI'S     INSTRUCTIONS     FOE    THE    GUITAR 


No.  19. 


Allegretto. 


feE&^gb^gE 


±=*=rs&t 


mf  —  — 


=  =  =      =rt 


-x#— 


r         I  i  i         -5-         /•*        i  -5*-  •#-  r    i     i      i         Ir 


-3"  /'  I 


r     ^? 


tPI 


i 


tat 


■5^"   -p-   r 


* — • 


^ 


mm 


$0  0  0 


f 


Si3 


Y 


r 


*-# 


fc*E=TU  1*3* 


^-^ 


-* 8^*~ 


h « -J « --■       r # , ,i — 


^r^tt^ 


ag 


_-#="=« 


#  _  »  _  •  -  j» 


:  =  =    :=:        />/>& 


© 


tft 


Zff    ZTT    Zf~r    Y         ~£TT    Zf 


4 


-# — • — * 


-#-1- 


tr 


F"    !* 


r       r       r 


P8 


A  urinate  inn   l  roppo 


No.  20.  fefizzri 


^g^^55^i|^^^^^-j  j|j7??ja^ 


7pf    f     F   ^ 


r 


^^g^ 


f^h* 


r%lf  "73>    f 


r 


JE^^E^^tegggg^Jd^j^^ij 


*f~  -B ■ 


f^Tfr  ^  f-    fT,..f  ^  f 


»»/ 


r   r    r 


T 


T-  r 


vr^r 


Oj"1  "CUT 


r   r 


»ffsr~frT  f  t 


CARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS     FOR    THE    GUITAB. 


87 


No.    21.  A.le«e«... 


Rondo.  jjEigrS 


Eg^i^^^^^^E^^^^^^^g^^^ 


P 


r 


3      V^f 


fe^S^fe#f#^^ 


r       i 


-• m- 


*z^£* 


T 


7-  r 


r 


r 


c^rJS 


/q" 


3F 


*i± 


MINOR. 


^EE&=  ESE=^ES>Z=S 


■f  *  ^ 


*r 


= — = — *= — -  y    -*-Ef+T I r IfP 


Li        ^  "Clf  "-*-#*-     —        "f-  =  "P-  "f-  ^  7^-  "f^ 


^^BJ^^fiMa^Bg|^^feg^^| 


F 


!^=^s^%^p#=P|«UMJ=^^g 


Wrw^  *r^rf^tWr*Wr  r 


r 


iii 


"l  -i 


F     r      *      r 


F  >       P 


fr~^ET "    r 


5£E 


^^- 


II 


r 


88 


CARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR. 


T>F~  F    ■' '         P    P    r  >"  F" 


No. 
Sicilian. 


r       f~Wr-f  vr.-  r  '  F  t  '  Y^^rh  r  P-=r^r- 


^^^^g^U^JS^^p^Bg^^ 


MAJOR 

5fr IV 


57 


t#- 


^  ^   r        r  r  ■  ■         f  ^  T 


g£^^ 


1 


r  r  r  r 


"T 


r 


"T" 


r    r      r    r      r 


r^ir 


D.  C 


No.  33. 


Motlernlo. 

I  I 


©4: 


/: 


4*= 


33^ 


*=?=£ 


J_*_JL 


^rpH-y-ry-^ 


r 


^ 


-*»- 


^^s^£m 


/*r-r 


& 


« — « 


±±ps!==a£ 


9 


q=>; 


fW 


*n  /  I  


|-^^Ei£||Eg^^Ej 


Wf-rff^T      |* 


f 


S—    & 


mf]  =  _ 


iJs^ 


§>  Lr  L*2^ 


23S= 


i£S 


ftH-p^Hpc 


S 


f9" 


3=3^ 


st 


* 


3^J- 


I  I  I  I 


gfcgSjjpilqp 


■f-  r 


££ 


i     W       I  I 

« — * — j* _J. 


zJ=at 


-Si- 


J^=dz^ 


T^ 


^ggg^l^a 


m/: 


"T 


r 

C7 


^/i—  i      r     *    J-   *      f5 -»-    -^:    W/r     — —      *  —  Sv 


■jj-  f-     r    -p- 


"l/1  =   _ 


rr  i    i 


iSH      3  *HS-     2  fljS^  I  -(St  2i©V      3  »<5>-      2  ».G>- 


tat 


CARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR 

^7 


Hi3 


^™^~ I 


-• •-»-#- 


S 


3^ 


-gzz: 


^S^EF^ 


-iS-rDim. 


-(9- 


-f9- 


*f*  >:    >i--S-j- 


^ 


^ 


HI 


No.  24. 
Gallop. 


;!r?^ 


£_g._Ul4 


j^gE^^^^j^jg^a^gEJ^gi 


1     '   r     r 


"P- 


-#-     —  —  -o- 


*=ggyg 


*= 


55 


Si^a^g^^ 


7    7 


'  i         '- 


iHii 


p 


^g^p&s^^^^^^^^l 


r^grr 


F*      3C       5;     "  ■/— p».« 


Andnntiuo  Kra.zioso. 


N«.  35.  &=#' 


1      8  t      I ■■ 


^-^ 


:^=5 


E: 


7s" 


7" 


-r 


^^^^^1^^^^^^ 


J3 


^T  = 


~r 


t±T  + 


=     *       =^— — -=_         ' "  r  r~r — -?—*=:     r  ?      r~ 

=         —  f*         7-  teal    '  t 

1  r  '      _-, 


7-    =  7^  ir    7-     r  7-        T 


Pouce. 


t»± 


> 


OT 


7"      7" 


qf~ 


^«^^^ 


* 


^zj»  £^r 


-0-m- 


7r 


-•-  -#-  ■#-  -p-p-  -0-  » 


■p-  -p-  -p-  -P-  -P-  -> 


-9- 


*#* 


a 


—    ^- —      —  Z~    —      ^  —      =r  /■=:  ip-  f  Ps         *— '5 


7/     r        7 


=  >/7izr 


&o 


CARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITaE. 


No.  26.^e? 


Walts.  gBr 

mf 


Ufl 


3 


gy=^»j| 


^  r 


£=^ 


-fcJ 


P§pPl 


^Jjilllf 


H0 


fT~f  -T  -f^ 


— t*3E^^ — * — g — •+— g — J-=g  J3S 


*       P  '      -*-•  —  —  hP  ^t  —  zz  3-  d.  c 

T*  "P"  '  "i*"1"  ~*T  TBarre 


8.   ST*! 
IVa.  27.  zSfcSzrriziz*: 


March.  Sp:  ^^y-r: 


S 


^ 


B3-: 


St 


J2^-J3- 


?7**—t=?z 


2        I 


^^ffgg^EEE^ 


"f"  * 


Thumb..  -J^t-1       =?  "S-UJ 


5 


^ 


s 


7-T 


H^ 


a^a 


'■T    ? 


*?*         ]2" 


£r± 


2^^ 


~PV 


PS 


ffi* 


3 


Lnrehetio. 


2        3 


usPg 


t^^^^^^^^^--— -J< 


f£j. 


-?-*- 


i£^ 


■^     r 


1  - j  ■ " — 0M=^ 


r~~ 


OARCASSIS     INSTBUCTIONS    FOB    THE     GOTTAR. 


91 


:fegj^|^gft^ 


i  i 


-#-• 


S^=^^3=^ 


r 


^^ 


fTpT 


V-J*-^ 


3^ 


i: 


<5£J^B 


J^lA 


Harm : 


7th      l»th 


£H^£ 


Allegretto. 


jfo.29.g*A=f£p^ 


Hondo. 


^3^ 


«»/ 7     s: 


:?=r*= 


^=r^- 


ts- 


1 


rfc* 


<s^  -#-  H-  ■#-  '  J  — 


@ 


d    \S    -* 


t 


9th  Pos. 


r 


^^^^^^(^^^a^iB 


/: 


!  r-  -*. 


is 

7 


1L         I'll  '.  I 


m/ 


«/V 


5S 


frg^jHty^ 


«/> 


r 


*/>  3 


Se^ 


»/> 


^^^S^Bil= 


3" 


*±t-0^JiMr- 


r 


**5 


313, 


SSSE 


cfc*= 


F" 


\ 


S*j£ 


\o.  30.^# 


CARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS     FOR    THE    GUITAR. 


mf 


I& 


^=±^tt 


gzjribfcste 


in. 


l     '     I 


=1 


jz: 


±*gdaJjT\    JX" 


^    FINE. 


r 


-.  f--    i^u    ^  ./  i  *  f- -£--'-£- 1  u  r  z 


£ 


■TO-dl^ 


e=^m^^^ 

"*"  "9"         "ST  -»" 


-J-. 


/  T3  "T^;   ^  ^  ^:    °-a 


LARGHETTO. 


:fcj: 


£ 


JC_|L_T   j 


lEIZOEp 


Aj l 


«=3 


P      I    T» 


l»-. 


~|~l — I 1 ] 


Hiiiiii 


^S^0M^M^MMm^mm 


d 

\P-f-.  P 


mkm^^^^^d^h 


CARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS     FOR    THE    GUITAR. 

1 i[ 


i>3 


^ — 


■M—5 


J 


-l       r* — - 


mf 


"i — i*~i      I    r~r - 


t — i 1    r  i      h- M      g  w 1 -* 1 


r. 

— ,-, . 


~r~r 


2#V1 


J- 3. 


g 


r-?- 


acxzaH 


tz_  i    r 


r^: 


— h  —     n    — i"  — r  "T  — 

—    '  -*-.  -+■  -f-.  -f- 


r  r  s/f       *i  f    Tfr-T 


No 
March. 


«£•_  ml_.  J       I — pL-J — r^-rn — i— 1 

= — %^    r   . 

pr  p  I  I 


zzjj: 


/> 


tcr 


1 


F 


3=3=11 


^f 


J     L*     l_  N 


~l~i7* 


S£3 


'H-i*- 


CtJ 


at 


BErE 


1   T* 


r-^ 


■■Cfi-3— a- 1 — J-"  "ssiL'Ean    I — jz  ^Jzifzzr 1. 


P 


r 


1st.  time.  3d.  time.  ; 

■J-fP-'1 — Jc-« i-4533-lt  ^^-4?T^4--r^H--h-i--h-J-^-<Lj-T 


»nf  r     t  ^        /  r  r 


94 


OARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR 


(to.  33.4MH& 


ALLEGRETTO, 


Rondo.  5 


*=* 


^-31 


1=1=1 


r    r 


r: 


F 


r 


i 


*=*- 


-^-£^l.i^J.      -. 


_c3_  m   ca   rn   9_  jTt*i  _n-,  _^   n~ £3J 

Q=si5=E=^izi===pz=?zirfj=izs-*:y=j-sE^ 


-!•-• 


-anr 


"£* 


r  f  ?"• 


^ «   rn   eg  j  I     rs  j  ii 


1  =  .j       1: 


1       1  = 


"#-#■ 


-*~w 


t      r   r   r 


i=QA 


[aJgJj-JljfflfeEa 


:£=* 


f 


r 


r^e- 


-P- 


y—     ■  4  -r-fl-P--^-*- 


:a 


:#*: 


r 


V 


* — L-* 


"^f-^.^p^%fepg^5^^E 


F 


r 


i~ 


r 


0-3 


4#-c«8. 


S$: 


I 


wi  */ 


fe^ 


rdi3iixd-z±3=irL*=rn3  --H 


1E8&: 


5b 


I 


5 


3_z:ii 


UARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR. 

55  J  * -     2 


»5 


i      I      I      I  T 


-fe-5 


rsrs 


■f-j      !   j  fine.  _   rn  j  i    *-s-,»j  -J-  (J-  4 


»"TT3 


s 


•r        ;.  _    -]  f    bJ~~T    -i    t:  f~ =  3- =i  _ 


BFFi^iF 


D.  C. 


I 


No.  35.i 


^FgL 


Rondo. 


r  -  r  f  r  -  t-rrr=  ^r r :^f~f 

*  l  iii     i 


^: 


ig^g? 


E^EEE 


1" 


5t=H*SF 


.rn    i TO  p=a 


igy  ===  "-gg  ===  i££T 


i 


jis: 


s 


r    ■»/  — L-     -  ^        '      /tin    I  h-P4h 


f  Thumb, 


T*" 


i4  Tiiuinu. 

._      ,       _^_,__,__ — 1_ — . — _ — 1_ — ±  


^  ^*"^  — = = ~  Hall.  »T*n»po. 


I 


im 


lAKOASSl'S     INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR. 


*  a  i*    I — I  3  v- 

M  36.  te*e=-*-i= 


Waltz. 


,.#-«- 


:f=^ 


v— 


§=£ 


T 


7"1" 


£ 


^ 


i^3^zd=33 


1 


r 


-jZZI__ 


lg=-*tZ2— =S=Zg 


P3 — T^_l  f*     oj  (i  i  i  L 


~ii — r 


-*«- 


&E^ 


i i  i  i 

w 


:»z}j~: 


n  i — n 


^S=S: 


*sS3E 


n^^-mr 


i  ^ 


^=fET;^ 


^ESj^EE: 


=1 — — r 


==l 


i  ' 'I 


-3=± 


Sur  la  2e  et  la  8e  corde.. 


r 


fio.  37.    -«-#- 


-f— 6- 
Larghctto.^=  —8- 


-*— * — fzzrz — 1 — — * — * — * 


9ePos. 


±1  J3T 


i  i  i 


'*±±M±*±=> 


'm- 


yrr—f 


fat* 


i   a 


E^racn: 


3—3: 


Hi 


T* 


/ 


I 


CARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS     FOR    THE    GUITAR. 


m 


N*.  38.  feg— F 


m/ 


'   u  i        '   u  u     t   'W*        '   t  l       ■   .,,1 


-J—  J" 9 rr-j-i — L_ — J-5I 2 — I — CITS-1 — 0=1=0 —  J — g~"~i~T~J  v     J »~t  ^ rmri 

U  y  <T»  •- T*~        P  *  V    Cm-" '"#  K»  U—1^      I 

I  ' 'U  I  " — 'U 


±E 


1*F? 


~5-=; 


5ffl 


-T— I         I      I      I       _#_JZ3_I J      . 


r^ 


^ 


#•!— 


j~T~i —       —  ~i  I  azg     s5 — "  1 
=fe=33E§*=E=g 


grf-^jr 


fgpiiiiii 


»z:SLI  1 


s/f 


SttSBE 


r-  j   r  i — i — .      r*  i   r*  .   ^  . — ^ — i      m   m_j 


r 


Sg 


p- 


• — — i 


1 — r 


s 


"i    i — r 


i    i 


~i     r 


i    i  i 


i     -»- 


q^-Cp-  fj=r-j=r-  t^Hj-tFh 


-• — i — i —      i    r 


iCil 


jn 


i 


r^z--i: 


T^ 


2 


)       "gr.  Cm.  "|*"« 


:P: 


#-f-. 


r    *r 


~g — rT'i 


jzj: 


m/ 


I     U    i  I     U   I  »        U     l^ff:  '     L*   I 


r    *r 


"f— !•' 


_£*• 


3: 


*ESE5r 


-t± 


srte 


¥  p » 


3M 


N     P 


a  Tempo. 


t»EE: 


z3: 


t=«= 


5Cf^ 


1 — r 


1 


rjii: 


^:j: 


5S 


_, — p- 


7T» 


r- 


ttJ 


£p^.z 


j|EJJ8^ 


!}& 


I    o    • 


m 


_«__*- 


OAKCASSI'S     INSTRUCTIONS    IOR    THE    GUItAR 

nun 


^ 


SF£?^=.-d?=-.p=±, 


0-0—0-tt-  -iUJIIrizczn — rrfufct 
M — I — erV  -.--—- 


*    i    i 


rv^;  t5 


*_m- xnu  4-j^fn-T-P^-J^-1^k =m .  rS-JCL-j m 


ite^^ 


rw-:  ^ 


J— =* a   a 90 — ■■ 


:«c»~ 


M #_ 


s 


r-if^^Htrf5 


s: 


«-«-*- 


*iPi 


•         i 


i-rr 


I 


a* 


^j^yzi^^tj 


H 


«tf3==>Fg=1=|-TX-C 


N«.  39,  Sfc^zrz: 


March. 


T~f 


g     . 


»/ 


«/ 


»^ 


-•— #- 


fe^^^^^^^=a=^^j. 


»/r 


S^ 


-»-   » 


i  -i  \_\ t 


f  r       T  T      T   r 


M    I    J   JV2-2 »— r   *Ti 


-«-«■=■«-«■ 
-0-0-0-0- 


fcsi  -?'•*  g'2  -Ts   n   j  j I   ,  j   n 


ff  t 


#■  "*" 


F 


f 


4J4ij|j1  4 -473- -«L.T?j j    i   n   r^rn    rrn  .   n  4 -S 43JH 

n  i  -u  i  i      .  _  .  _  .  _ 


F — ~ — — tfo — f 1-0-0 — •-= — i— — — =r 1 : 

ff- ■#-    r    /'  ■     ■     r      rrn    ?-r-r  trtr  =  =  =  = 


Hfc*- 


^p^te 


r     ri 


■=r  f  rn  / 


CARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR 


09 


s£J  F 


r-r    i^-r 


SClf  "     i^ 


ri=-> 


:S  2"= — ■" 


-  —  'nolce. "fS>-  -(9-  -1 


j-      — *1   *1-|»:-|»-1    -  —Dolce. EEf 

LA      Lj     F      7"       F  F 


r 


tfc*- 


e^  * 


43FFf-y..  i^: 


q^-^r-H- 


SE|=J:raa 


r"3T' 

fclribwi 


g^pgfeg 


l 


r 


Andantino  grazioso.  l^^^^1 


r 


F%   £ 


#== 


F 

m«   i   i 


F 


jiszmac 


8 


r 


?: 


No.  40 


-  M""n.  ma       ■*? ^_b_-l_j m 


n~a     jmp  CETZXin     *»*~T     — *~> — VW\ 


"/. 


7    f 


r 


=H 


^J^     \Wl  —  ^i_raqpgzzij_i! « jut. 


mt~  ~T[j_ir  -  -    T~£ 


r 
f 


^*_s    m   =5    m       &    i — r 


^=g=g=B^iE— 3— 3ig 


f  I  I,  I  »    '       ' 


3    i — r 


*£*"»: 


^=3 


4riJ| 


J L  m ! I ! L 


1 


fe 


^mm^smsm^^^^s^m^^ 


mf 


H~=  "T-E-T^ 


-»"      "»" 


T 


T 


r 


-#7* 


a. 


*— ^ 


^ 


9lh  P«.       ^^"i—^ 


f    r 


f   *i 


r 


?        ' — 3  u         y  h  i  i  i  f  c —   dzb   a=d 


OARCASSI'S*     INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR. 


Aji  it         i     i  -i     111     r>       |   _r  J     I  * — t_  C"r*-I 

I       1       I        '  pp-& 

Rail t  <S 

4th  Pos. 

•r         -—  *         ~m  J-  «»i         ^  ~r 

r  r  ,f 

4th  Pos. 6th  Pos. ; ;  7th  I 


I 


r  r 

4th  Pos. 

sr « ^ rz: j_ h      'r — ^ _ f^—^Er^-f — =i — c 

7»-  r  ' '  "»-  -»- 

r  i  i  i  i 

4th  Pos. 6th  Pos. 7th  Pos 


^-=^_-_^_.__i|^^_£_^__t  &^l.--± r t 

I  I  I  ^ Ball.  V       I  ■* 

I— I— I       P— P—  I       I       !  I— I— I 

i«Fn  /tI  ^-L  I  J  ^-a-«m  ^^  FF  en  BH  ^5  — «  -^ 

ajl»  _  11*1    I i  -*— —  i  -*-   i^&5_» l_S&  J_L|  __-— r^   H— I   *  j  i  X*H  —p-i   — »m    K*n 


I— I— I        P— P—                                 I  I        !                                I— I— I 

i«Fn  /tI  ^-L  I  J  -*-a-«m  ^^  FF           en  BH  ^5  — «  -tfl 

ajl»  _  11*1    I i  -*—  i  -*  _K5g  * i_Sh  ■     I  _— — r«a  HH  *  j  i  77^.  -pi  .— rs    u*r*! 

V—  zz               z:  -4         ^       zr                I            -g— -p    q3       3-j. =j 

f                ?     .  /                 f                f                              f  ^ 

W-—  ^=3pi^==rg-'=\ zzjzzpp- gzjazzj^zzjgzzzz:  :q=jb*--jrg-=jril_*-=gzz{: 

w          zz                     •  =j            r»          *      H                   'd                   * 


— L  u  l  ■  *■  -       -a  -+ 

n»ff      ,»-g  -RP   £5^   F^     — ^   P^5  j£&  F^2   ^-*a   F?*_^2i   iT*-37   J      I 

4        T  >-       r        ^~"        r         =  r  -- 


CAftOASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOB    THE    GUITAR. 


101 


A  urinaria** 


IVen  pin  ferJJB — yr- ^ 
fiesta.    t>' 


f— p-f^ 


-J- 


~?  * 


*     3 — #y 


s 


^^=* 


4-4-    i   ...>  .^i_w5u_v5i  ^ — pa     \_^^rjtJ^ti   f 


l^^F 


±=%£-&-^i=± 


3fe *- 


_&      -r^  v?      -F- 


=i=^ 


± 


riii 


s 


0~W1>- 


pm— P— -  - 


-^r^3 


-^=^ 


r  i    •*" 


t3- 


T^~'W 


r#- 


Var.  1.  fc?i±=fc 


Sfg^B^383,01^^^ 


•»/ 


-&- 


-^J^^B 


J 


-* 5ti=-E2: 


lLJ  —  r         r    ^    r    r 


1  3 


!*.H*.  "•"-"-^ 


-#•      -»-      -m-      -m-  > 


T    -f- 


cii^ 


g^^^-j^^gg^z^^g^3^^^=g 


-r 


-p- 


r 


-p- 


m^f 


it 


Legerement. 


V»r.  !.  fc!^3E 

p ' — T 


gE^=^=ji^»!^=^=^=^ 


w 


■p- 


Sil 


• •- 


15* 


r 


H^Hgil 


f 


r 


m 


102 


CARCASSI'S     INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR 


=i— — ==  -I       — S^ 3 —       y.*^= — -i    — ^^ 

t  i  r  r  r 


"n*     r 


r 


^^^^j^P^Bx^^g^^g^ 


» 


-0 — •- 


^S^g^H^ 


t^rr    /p 


^^^^PPEgS 


r 


33=1= 


r 


r   r   r 


^rr 


•  * 


*• 


^ 


^-"""TTrn 


f 


S^E: 


-#-#-. 


If 


^33 


s 


5 


^ 


*-n-f    f 


*1V 


lgf^r^-4-^ 


5t      / 


Si         ia^ 


.  -*-  -*-  s^itl  ti*Ij2 


^-^^J-Tih-FF^^^-Pi  ^f5  ^^-^T^-g 


FH     i      1.4 


-s- 


•gj- 


IB 


WwmfwwF0f% 


3= 


#g—  --g 


±^: 


PTTTT-^ 


NO.    42.  AlleBrc... 


Air  Swissc 


•®4=¥ 


^E 


S 


;fa=g«bz^F^=i 


E^JE 


*n — i 


r—r 


g-^g ' — I-     _.    ^~~>     d 


i  r 


B^jSj 


r 


3^" 


r-1 


/r 


^^ 


rt 


s 


i      i      r 


-#*- 


S 


IT^ 


-•(_jf- 


Sif^S 


^ 


# •■ 


n 


r     *L^_f_r  *r 


r 


I* 


T  p- 


fa 


-# »- 


^^zz=^fct=^^==^^i=zEzzz±tI 


CARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR. 


ioa 


T«  i.  s^ 


i-        f  -(S>-  —  as*-  -m-        T  e>-  —  -»-       -#- 


m/f- 

7th  Foe.  .  .  . 


*iHi 


**: 


S 


3d  Pos. 


V»r.  %.  $=g 


feti 


'mm 


M 


m g_j:  »       »^"  *     J     T 


e 


7thPos-.- 


1 


f 


fav 


-p— *• 


^ 


-« =-#■ 


a^^Sp^j^tt^l^ 


£=*=£ 


^ 


3     I    "  i        J        i-S- 


/r 


P  ! 


"#*- 


s 


l/a*7 


:£=-7 T- 


H 


CB 


* — «- 


£ 


Vr' 


J IS        J . J       J3-J       S3-  S*^         —  I  '.        ,        in    !»'<■■  "  "  '  '    2d  lime,       \       { 


t^ — *— 

vr 


f^W^? 


^[/^T  -"y^Pf 


Pk^ 


isa 


I*=t 


-r 


^ 


•       ! 


- — *— ^g »- 


?»»/ 


r 


3:-^e±2 


:*z^=* 


i^a 


3^ 


H=rr 


J^-P 


^ 


fe^A^5 


=t±fct 


i 


? 


« — # 


• — =-• 


* — # 


f^ww^rf^fF^? 


p 


r»#  __[» — W*-W--h^*-+3h=  -+w- 


^ 


«*=J«_[J«-^ 


s^ 


3 


i 


=Se± 


*+• — «- 


m/ 


r      r 


/f 


r 


104 

Ho.  43. 
Von 


ffcbcr's  fe=£f 
Waltz. 


CAECASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS     FOR    THE    GUITaB 


pf* 


-p. 


7        + 


I  I  I 


^    ~f 


-» — 
1  -•- 


■f    -r 


T_  F~T  re/T  "    "   :s:sA»-       3 


r  r    J  i         r 


g^^^n^yiim^y^^^g 


i  r  Doicc.   p 


r 


p/lf    ^ 


1     s/' 


^^i^iJ^gi^^^^^^i-Eigdp 


i 


-r 


r 


* — j» — # — -^i- 


Var.  253E 


-^J- 


~l    ^>  I  I~  I*  :'— , —  I*!    1— a 1 


~& ¥ 


ml 


^^^-^-^-^-^.pg 


"F      r 


i        i 


--*m. 


'-=ii 


£&m 


w  *J. 


r    ? 


* — K-* 


IS 


i— ^ •Tta*- 


cfcL_ 


OARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR. 


105 


A± 


^^-^^^•-^^^-f^rrr^-^j^fr^=^=?5: 


1 


^     T 


-&- 


V. 


■^^p^m^^^f^^E^^^^f^^^ 


*?• 


/i     ^w-    *r    31 


r      i 


w 


w 


-3 

— M 


r    f 


■^     3     ^     3     ^  ^  r     :■:■:■  - 


*o.  44.     #_# 


Amlnutino* 


Air 
Italian. 


-fc#- 


wi/ 


^^^5^S^fe^ 


F 


r 


it 


=tt 


-*— 2— i 


=SJ^ 


i  i 


f      r 


=  =~+  '  ^  r  Er^r-^  ivr    *    r-r=  r-r=  r^r^-r^-r 


LdV  ."CtCrt? 


Hrr) ~ —     —     — ^tw       ;  ~  »•"  ™  «  ~T 1 I I__* M tC 


Vm.1.|ZS 


*=J3 


yjgs^ 


PP 


str 


=gB=^r 


g=^JSg^fe^ 


"P" 


9th  Pos.. 


^jJ^^f^^-EE^^g^pEB 


^#7 


-rs-" 


FTU     J     t 


tP 


jtfcHfti 


^  P-  —  -j  +  l'f  mfV 


^tpspjljllp. 


r         r        f    ' 


I  « 


¥=£ 


CAECASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THi!    GUITAR. 


y^^^gjgsig 


■? 


1 


r 


I  S         -rS^ 


5tJt 


R3 — r 


a 


&*- 


r 


* — t 


?.t.s.s±S 


-•— y- 


s* 


9th  Pos.- 


r 


1  -ar      i  i 


1 


-  Dolce 


r 


r  Cry  p-  ? — ^V^Sf^ 


V      f-  i:    m/T 


9th  Pos. 


r 


/>/'  **fs+l      T         T 


arp: 


3s 

-s>- 


r 


w 


SS=B 


yi'^^i^^p^Jg^^^^ 


/^ 


pEHf^^fiita 


>p 


-p- 


3AR0ASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR. 


107 


*:  45. 

ftnke  dc     7T~g~3- 


3l«*      ii  d—^-ui-M — sfex  rrri  -m 


Reiehstadt's 
Waltz. 


j9?  T 


r  *~"r     3     rr      r      r  '  p 


■^j 


^=13=^ 


gHJ^*     4  A 


i=Jb 


-/&-• 


~r~ r 


r~T 


"r" 


r  -i_-  r  "T^   r   "P1 


fcfc 


3 — * 


3^Fi^i=st 


jbjg 


T        ■—        f        : 


1 


^ 


^?— » 


l^H 


m/r     t    —    r     r    —  y     r  -^  * 

r  r         r 


likJt 


^E^ 


±=&+-t 


si 


fe^E 


:« £ 


-8^-^ 


f* 


-##- 


1-         "P 


-P-" 


x      —        s/— 


fe^ 


*»:  — 


E&EE3 


-st- 


J3i 


f~  I     »- 


:¥=g 


SE 


H  t     pr   ^~r 


*      5=      V 


-f- 


r*-*: 


•p' 


?      =      T  s/— 


"P" 

i 


-P-' 


I9" 


ifc*^ 


^3=M^=#^^ 


^€Ha 


* 


T7- 


r    ^    ?     t 


*     *  V 


r^ 


Barre. 


:g        g 


g--^=^i^5^-^-w-^-J 


*8^_ 


^W 


1^1 


-p.- 


P\ 


gjj^Epq^gi 


I 


"P 


J-*-P-M 


,-t    ^      -^ 


^^~T" 


cfc 


«I 


=F 


r~*~ 


IU8 


OAROASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS     FOR    THE    GUITAR 


To  ex  jcu.e  the  following  pieces,  the  Guitar  must  be  tuned  i      Pour  executer  les  trois  nwrcenux  suivan.s,  il  tau;  accoi4«r  l» 
In  E  Major.  I  Guitare  en  Mi  Majeur.  . 


Example  j 


^r 


j— J— ^^ 


I 


**• 46,  -t^*a^ 


i^Ai —.3 E. -L_  *Q 


4th  Pos 


* —  -  •-y-0^^-0 — ^— 


4th  Pos 


T 


_ ^ 


F" 


r 


H 


r 


eft**--- 


gr.  Barre, 
I  5th  Fret. 


''■     — ^    3t£    3£-*-±J- J!  J    I1    | 


fflj^gg 


■^  i, 


£ft*s=^ 


J 


Freti. 
12    - 
Fin,     harm. 


-     7lh      -     5th        -*-       12«h-        -       - 


I 


l        321     3        243      I5  I5       4       321       3  2     4     3 


S=d-«l- 


ittf=±tt 


7«h  12lh 


■?-  i 


^ 


-»-    4  J 


1 


F" 


■w  ^ 


harm- 


m 


j.. 


i 


a 


31 


pp=* 


t-    yr 


y  «r~y 


T 


r     f 


r 


I    7  y       tj  y 


f 


Hlo.  47.  *#_ 
«allop.   eP 


fz*SE£ 


iSjg^^-w-R  a  Fn 


^=  F    =   :"T"' -7"  "  f     "^ 


MS 


g — *- 


m 


r 


—-T 


1 


f     f 


^jla^digi^^i^^^fei-ga 


;  4th  String. 


r=tf^f 


f"   F 


f 


CABCAS&rS    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR, 
harm*  harm.  r-,  ^T3      N 


harm. 
7th 


^^m 


r 


*v 


f* 


■p" 


r 


rf 


r*A. 


* *- 


#=S 


r^ 


T3--*- 


m^g^fajy 


4       1     2  "3        mf-J-  T  —  f        4     8     34     14       123  -J-      •'  f  — S-^l—    p.  <;. 

p  p  p  gr.  Barre. 


4 #- 


±=i=*z 


■3k±i 


-4 4 #■ 


34     1     4       12     3 


No.  4$. 


Han*.  %pEZ&+4 


fc£ 


:fe*s 


B^igvi-jaiAi  j&i  ^ 


gr.  Barre. 
7th  Fret 


3H= 


-J-5-     -J-       I-*!'*-'1 


40-0-0 


j  «r.  J  #- 


-»       » 


^sm 


"P7  P~  P~ 

~_  5th  12th  5th  7th  ~_,  —  harm.     -    - 

-J.    r«M->-4-      A?      i    J     i    J      I-*-    i    i        -Jt3-     -J    .-4^4-  4     J3-     -«r    ,-4/4-1-       ra     j      J      i      J 


*=* 


d^7~t- 


i     p 


= — r 


Tr=T  t~t 


T.    T  T 


= — r 


g 


=FtTtT7t-=^-»   r 


^-  -*-  -» -  f   =         *    p  =      -»-     —     r  &L^ 


r^  'P"  4th Pw.    r 


ggi 


S 


■  i     ,   ,/TT"  -*■ 


^^ 


I 


"*T* 


3 


s^ 


s 


9  IO 


CARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    GUITAR 


aSafe^. 


•SB 


32 


r 


"S"« 


S£ 


? 


"i — r 


e 


1 


#_4_^^i*_j*1_«3-rJ_ 


-fcrf 


I  I 


F 


».  «• 


Explanation  of  the  Signs. 

tS    ORDER    TO    EXECUTE    THE    TWO    FOLLOWING    PIECES. 

Friser.  —  Indicates  that  the  fingers  of  the  right  hand  are  to 
be  kept  closed,  with  the  exception  of  the  thumb ;  and  opened 
one  after  another,  letting  them  pass  over  all  the  strings  without 
any  movement  of  the  arm. 

Pouce. — The  thumb  of  the  right  hand  must  be  passed 
ightly  over  all  the  strings. 

Index.  —  Pass  the  index  finger  of  the  right  hand,  very 
:.ghtly,  from  the  highest  to  the  lowest  string,  quite  close  to 
he  rosette. 

Vibration.  —  Let  the  fingers  of  the  left  hand  fall,  in  hammer 
fashion,  upon  the  notes  so  designated,  with  force  enough  to  set 
the  strings  vibrating,  without  (pinching  or)  snapping  them. 

Tambour.  —  Strike  with  the  thumb  of  the  right  hand  upon 
al.  the  strings,  near  the  bridge,  with  force  enough,  but  without 
liardness. 


Explication  dcs  Signcs. 

POUR  EXECUTER  LES  DEUX  MORCEAUX  SUIVANTS. 

Friser. — Indique  qu'il  faut  tenir  les  doigts  de  la  main 
droite  fermes  a  l'exception  du  Pouce  :  et  les  ouvrir  los  uns 
apres  les  autres  en  les  faisant  passer  sur  toutes  les  Cordes,  sans 
faire  de  mouvement  avec  le  bras. 

Pouce.  —  II  faut  passer  le  Pouce  de  la  main  droite  legeicmen 

sur  toutes  les  cordes. 

Index.  — On  passe  l'Index  de  la  main  droite,  tres  legeremenl 
depuis  la  chanterelle  jusqu'a  la  derniere  corde,  bien  pres  de  la 
Rosette. 

Vibration.  —  II  faut  laisser  tomber  les  doigts  de  la  mail) 
gauche,  en  forme  de  marteau,  sur  les  notes  indiquees ;  avec 
assez  de  force,  pour  mettre  les  cordes  en  vibration  sans  .fee 
avoir  pincees. 

Tambour.  —  On  doit  frapper  le  Pouce  de  la  main  droite,  et 
en  longueur  sur  toutes  les  cordes  pres  du  chevalet  avec 
de  force,  mais  sans  roideur. 


Vibr.       'Friser. 


Pouce. 


Waltz. 


Y      f 


Vibr.      Tambour. 


-J33. 


¥  ^  *  * '   r  r-        r      '   ' 


Vibr.     Tambonr. 


lip! 


ESEyE^ 


r  r  r 


=    r 

T  r   r 


HL-* 


OAROAbSI'8    IN8TKUCTI0NS    FOB    THE    GUITAR. 

u 


HI 


FINE. 

:  lit.  time.    :  2d.  time.  :  I    DOL,         a 


B: 


-M&Z3M. 


r      t 


¥~~% 


^^1 


?*. 


_.  zzh±£ z  ~~wn :. 


Priser. 


Pouce. 


Sr-^ 


ff-^-     Gv.  barre.        -J  ^f 


Pouce. 


Pouce. 


Index. 


Index. 


Pouce. 


r 


2zis: 


IDOI 


w 


m^f 


i 


r=^ 


§ffil 


fe8 


i  r  r 


it  \        /%      9   9 

Galop.  ^=*- 


81   J     I     I 


i  j*T 


|~ezezti 


r=£=i 


izB: 


^z*=Fq-i 


zaza: 


:*S 


:-ra=p 


i 


r 


■v  r 


S 


Hj 


» 


Friser.  Friser. 

E3        .N 


■_l I  !  I I 


■f-  f-      U  mf 


3&s 


g_= 


Friser. 


k*      U> 


ill 


LE 


:E=n 


rf  -r 


112 


CARCASSI'S    INSTRUCTIONS    FOR     THE    (itllXAh 


S^f^fTn^:. 


r 


i  i  i 


r  r  -=-         -F         -p-        -p-       f  c 


Vibr.  Tambour.  ^-^*l 

r-i      L-**«^E^2 


-4 


c    i   i.LTt 


Vibr.  Tambour.  F 


: i5jtz 5— S^T*  * ■ 1 

—     w         « 


^Pf\M      U.    ^       iui  _ ,    8  i2e  louche.       j'"        P  J-*"    H  fT#  ha™- 

p:s|fi    =c     ^i       i    DC-     -l    ---32   3     w/    I       *   '        r      *  ** 


=w  p  ff  t  - 


Fi>. 


/Vt    t^Eh 


R .  J^l 


-a— e-'-h? 


~*r 


m 


■$. 


113 


Sbwly,  with  ~_ 
simplicity     ifaj-j- 
Mid  feeling.  Sis: 


A  TEAR  SHALL  TELL  HIM  ALL. 


ARRANGED  STU  MMGNEN. 


WE£ 


^ES 


— 1 — U-J — !-j^-l -i^T  j- 


i 


•p-' 


*  T 


3=35. 


-£-+3- 


-&^V — ft 


^i^S^^§s=^^g^^a 


1.  ATmoonlight,  near       the  broken  cross,  Young  Ebert     fond  -  -  ly,  fondly  swore  To  love  but    me,  and  on  -  ly 


f=f— r — £f-f — r  ^n — ,*— *£- — 3 


-l-J — P-w- 


^ 


IEEEEES 


£=*= 


pgil^sSgll^igE^Ei 


^=fc?s 


11 


me, 


Till  life,  till  life  should  beat  no  more 


To  note  that  vow  on  heaven's  high  name  So  fervent  -  ly        he  seem'd  to 


zr£5=f£5^zrJ!5: 


&-f—f      r       r—r      -}-    ,       ->      -r-      -r-  -f-     -r-     -r-  -f-      r 


&=£« 


:-V-15<-t.r 


-&-#—¥-  L-!- 


:*— *: 


call,  That  ere  my  fait'  -  ring  voice  replied      A   tear,  a    tear 


liad  told  him  all : 


m^mjuij^^mi 


That  ere  my  fait'  -  -  ring  voice  re 


1 


i 


•  plied        A  tear,  a     tear  had  told       him    all . 


SEfc 


± 


HT^-t 


r-  I     I     i     1 1"""!  t— i— I-h"^^^-t-*-# — "J-i 


-p-" 


rr  r 


Eg 


^EEggJE^E^sji 


Though  heedless  of  his  vow  he  prove, 

His  falsehood  I'll  not  harshly  blame ; 
And  should  he  wander  back  to  me 

I  will  not  ask  him  whence  he  came. 
No  angry  frown  shall  cloud  my  brow, 

No  murmur  from  my  lips  shall  fall ; 
But  ere  this  heart  in  silence  break 

A  tear,  a  tear  shall  tell  him  all 


114 


Voice. 


(■altar. 


MARY    OF    ARGYLE. 


ARRANGED  BT  A    SCHMIT*. 


;es 


a 


Poc©  Allegretto  e  drlicntezzn. 


:*    rziz^zz 


£**£*z 

IzfzzzSzzz 


-fiv»- 


•*=, 


:|==rt 


:==* 


13 


a=a= 


>    r 


HB 


^iigiiliiii^l^^i^E^II^iliigli^ 


1.  I     have  heard  the  ma-vis  singing        His     love-song  to   the  morn;   I  have   seen  the  dew-drop  clinging  To  the 


±fc±3=EM 


"^ 


— ar 


r 


r      -t   * 


-« 


r    r 


=Bz=^Ezl 


1 


f 


Ptf— jV 


^3= 


£±:£ 


izji— pr 


ȣ 


-«-=!-•- 


"NzZiV 


tozzzz^i^z:^— zzzzz^zzzN— z^i 

*zz3zzlz?zz*z  j^&LJgLjL^fcSdBB 
»_z! 1 a    p — 5 z1 1 


-*—*- 


roga  just  newiy  bom:  But  a  sweeter  song  hascheer'd  me, At  the  ev'ning's  gentle  close;  And  I've  seen  an  eye  still  brighter  Than  the 


ra_n 


,* — r 


Ri  (ard> 


~l —  •  — i — m 1 — *•-! — J0-A — — ■*• — i — ^m-i-m-m-m 4**- 


zzzizzJzzzizSzzi=z:r 
Ezzz=zzzzEB 


:*=t: 


-I — -=-- » — ^ Z| Z» — ]a] — #       _»>_.L_^ — }- — hi — 0—--B = — •--* — + 

iBzzzdzz'zzzfzzr^zfzzdzzrzzzz-fzzzzz'z.  g  z.  S_ztzzzzzzJzzLiS=z:f 


dew-drop  on    the  rose ;  'Twas  thy      voice,  my  gen  -  tie      Ma-ry, 


3ZZ*Z 


m- 


3 


zE 


And  thine    art-less  winning  smile, 

z3zz= 


That 


:?=3^?zz=rtz-zzrp: 


53=.=q: 


« c i 


* zzt 


0 0 0 —  [ 


1^- 


:zNzzfsz=TZizzpzz^zz-pzi:#zzzzz:zz^izz^zg 

-d — ~* — *—£ b — b — b— r-b — *--« — I ^-d- 

:zz= *zz^zzzzzzzzzz?zl^zz^zz*zztzz=ez*: 

of 


made  tnis  world  an     B-den,       Bonny    Ma-  ry 


fcfcd 


■te=± 


Ar-gyle 

—4 


r 


k 


? 


ztzzmzj: 
Szzfz^Jriz 


P 


zfzzzzz»zzzfc*i*zzzJz*zz*zzPi 


r 


«=* 


r 


•  ICO ND      VER  8  ■ 


Though  thy  voice  may  lose  its  sweetness, 
And  thine  eye  its  brightness  too ; 

Though  thy  step  may  lack  its  fleetness, 
And  thy  hair  its  sunny  hue: 

Still  to  me  wilt  thou  be  dearer 
Than  all  the  world  shall  own; 


I  have  loved  thee  for  thy  beauty, 

But  not  for  that  alone : 
I  have  watched  thy  heart,  dear  Mary, 

And  its  goodness  was  the  wile 
That  has  made  thee  mine  forever, 

Bonny  Mary  of  Argyle. 


SPEAK    GENTLY. 


iadante 


S 


ES£ 


115 


ARRANGED  BY   E.   B.  BOHUSZEWICZ 

3.  Speak  gen  -  tlv  to  the  lit  -  tie 


— =±=EjSEz= 


1.       Speak  gen -tly,  it   is  bet-tei 


III  8  _  p  __-^ 


child, 


Its     love       be      sure      to     gain; 


— 1 


Teach    it      in    accents  soft     and   mild  — 


It 


-<s- 


^      fM  tV  rule       by      Wetfanfear.  Speak  gen  -  tly,  let  not  harsh  words  mar  ^  Tlw 


may         not    long      re  -  main. 


s— *- — Et=3=?-  *-| 


~\—G>- 


4.  Speak    gen  -  tly     to       the  young,      for  they      Will   have 

:=r^4=^-=*=E=^fEtEE"£E?EEdE£±Et 


e  -  nough     to 


~^- 


good        we    might    do      here. 

feS^EESE 


2.  Speak    gen  -  tly !  love    doth  whis   -    per  low 


The  vows     that  true     heart! 


1* 


oear; 


-<S>- 


Pass  through  this   life     as     best  they  may, 


'Tis  full        of       anx  -  ious    care. 

E^^IEEEE|EEEEgJ=1lEE 


EFeU 


gen  -  tly  friendship's  accents  flow, 


Af  -     -     -  tec      tion's  voice 


kind. 


bind;  *"«       g™-uj  uiom^.y.- ,  .- — •<— "1       .-] 

&j-*-+++?  *___  p  -*-  BmlI.  -^j  -j,- 


Speak  gently  to  the  aged  one, 
Grieve  not  the  careworn  heart ; 

The  sands  of  life  are  nearly  run- 
Let  such  in  peace  depart 

6 
Speak  gently— kindly  to  the  poor, 

Let  no  harsh  tone  be  heard ; 
They  have  enough  they  must  endure 

Without  an  unkind  word. 


Speak  gently  to  the  erring— know 
They  may  have  toiled  in  vain ; 

Perhaps  unkindness  made  them  so. 
Oh !  win  them  back  again. 

8 
Speak  gently!— He  who  gave  his  life 

To  bend  man's  stubborn  will. 
When  elements  were  in  fierce  strife, 

Said  to  them.  "Peace  be  still" 


Speak  gently!— 'tis  a  little  thing 
Dropped  in  the  heart's  deep  well: 

The  good,  the  joy  which  it  may  bring, 
Eteruitv  shall  telL 


116 


Andantino 


GUITAK. 


f 


s 


\ 


OH,  WOULD  I  WERE  A  BOY  AGAIN. 


t^Q 


* 
Nf 


.-a 


ARRANGED  BY  L   MEIGNEK. 

1.  O  would  I  were        a    boy  a    • 


3E 


zzczzXzzzpzt 

-3— #— b4 


-qV 


^V 


:=* 


m 


-t- 


r 

-rffc 


z=^zSSz±EE*E=cE= 

^•zz^fzEzrzzzSzztezzS 


-  gain,  When  life  seem'd  form'd  of  sunny   years,     And  all  the  heart    then  knew  of  pain, Was  wept  a  -  way        in  transient 
5 — • — • »-f — * — * 0-Y—  9 — »— — »:f;zz*zzzfz 

*>  -r    -r-      ^        ^    -r  -,-    f      -r 


=y=ari3ferEg=E3s3Nf 

zzjrrzzizzifzzzfc- zr^zzSfzzz: rzzztEfct 


:=Ps 


-V— !*- 


£ 


3 


-suP- 


=t<=£ 


:2=z*f2 


2=* 


qVzzN  :qVrzzzzz  zzzzNzjV 


tears,     Was  wept  a    way 


=T 


3- 


s 


in  transient  tears.  When  ev'ry  tale 


fEzzzzz±zz^*=zzEEt 


:?z* 


z:zz#t 


hope  wisper'd  then 


My   fancy  deem'd    was  only 


:EF 


:3s 


Com  iiRina. 


:EEEE« 


3* 


IrSzzzzzzzz*zfz*zzz*zz^-yizzzz=z^zz*z=|^:} 

— i~:_-S_  -^     Ai_  i /-\ ii» » 


truth,       O  would  that  I       could  know  a  -  gain       The  happy      visions 


of    my  youth  !  O  would  I  were         a  boy    a 


33^ 


r 


"|S'- 


3= 


a 


ES: 


1 


Wz: 


:zzzN: 


zEzSggKp 

_# — #^-_C!ZZ__pZ 


gain,  When  life  seem'd  form'd  of  sunny    years.  When  life  seem'd  form'd  of  sun 


1 


tzi'zztw. 


StzESEH: 
zzfzzzfzzzzzfzlz 


^£* 


5 


aLizzizzizzjzizzzi 


zfff» 


•zlz 


fcafc 


W 


-4-  -©• 


^Hfebs 


izzHzzSz 


H- 


-  ny  years. 
I 

a 


»ra/ 


.. ._« — -l_ 


& 


& 


j: 


zrzzzzzzzzzzzfczjzzfczlzzt 
=S^ feg Izzg 

t-   r        -r      /r 


zzit 


*-* 


P 


'Tis  vain  to  mourn  that  years  have  shown 

How  false  these  fairy  visions  were, 
Or  murmur  that  mine  eyes  have  known 

The  burden  of  a  fleeting  tear. 
But  still  the  heart  will  fondly  cling 

To  hopes  no  longer  priz'd  as  truth. 
And  mem'ry  still  delights  to  bring 

The  happy  visions  of  my  youth. 
0  would  I  were  a  boy  again, 

When  life  seem'd  form'd  of  sunny  yean 


117 


QUEEN    OF    MY    SOUL. 


ARRANGED  Bl   F.    WEILAND 


nrili  VeeliBs. 


4U1TAR. 


_3 


" 5 — " --±—— =£z_.___;*zi__zzz___:»z#-t*z:    •■ 


Queen  of  my  soul !  whose  star-like  eyes,  Are  al!      the     light  I       seek  ; 


Whose     voice 


in      sweet  -  est 


g=±r^— f--|-»zfzE^zzfzf=±:»-S-|^-*-* — —3 — •— z --2=.-   — ~S— ==fcn=S=3=3=:S=  5 


/ 


tTIA       _■         In     _     niao         -".-fr.  l/inn  i  i  ^^-^" 


3t=; 


lo  ■  dies     Can      love       or     par  -    don     speak,  ....         Can     love       or     paTI  don    speak 


^P^pp%p=fef^lpli3i|pigiliiii^j 


r  t 


•-  r 


r  _= 


^=te 


H =1 =  .- 


H 1 — # 


fc=:qV 


bow  me 


to  thy       lo.'d     con-trol, 


qV:z^-jv-^— T:zf_zr|-_r=-l_-zft-Zzzizzfc_-zz£zN 

Queen  of  my  soul,      Mary!  Mary!  Queen  of  my  soul ; 

I    i    i    i    i  R5 

H-*~!-|r.-=-|-|-* 


i  —  _,_  7    ■  '  7        i*  -,•-  i 


^r:^: 


ENDri'i«m 


Ma  -  ry ! 


&EEgEjE=E 


Ma-ry!  Queen   of     my  soul! 


§«_  J    J     J    _B_-    _P— *— !— l'               I                                        I           te  I       ,       I       I       I    1     *    I       i       j       i       i^  Rail. 

=P-— =:=zz:-SZ_zz •-_■>-» 1 3 zzzjzz zJzz zizz  zzJzzzszz-j--Tnrf— 2— •— 5 — =>-F|- 


W5i  h  Feeline 


!.  The  Mountain  of  thy  native  shore,  Are  cold  and  dim     and    _r»_         Ah  !    .T^.^JJ-.  .k„:_ „_....._„ tm._-__._-  ~. 


2.  The  Mountain  ofthy  native  shore,  Are  eold  and  dim     and   gray,       Ah!   linger  'midst  their  clouds™  more,  Thy  home  is  far  a    -    way"    Thy" 

3.  The  per-fum  d  rose  for  thee  is  twin'd.  The  lute  awakes  its  strain  ;      Then  shall  the  with'ring  northern  wind  Steal  all  thy  sweets  in  vain  ;     Steal 


Mi -ma    la       _m  _•  «    _    -mn  ■.-.    I  _»/ 1 Til.      11  -_-_  -        ""~  -__.  


T?    -» *->--_--__y__. -_^j. zpzzi_.zzzzrzz__z_i_r_z_z:^_irzzzz±_z___:±?z*zzz|zz±t 

tome  is  for      a  -  way !      Where    Italy's  blue  waters  roll,  Queen  of  my  soul !  Ma7y !      jfiry  !  Queen  of^y  soul!  SaTy!  MaTy" !  Queen  of  my  soul! 
.Uthysweets  in     -am,  No  !  fly  beyond  thy  fate's  control !  Queen  of  my  soul!  Marv!  Mary!  Queen  of  my  soul !  Mary  !  Mary  ,  Queen  af  myTaTl 


118 


I 


MOUNTAIN    MAID'S    INVITATION. 


ARRANGED   BY  J.  E    mj4/L» 


59 


mingii 


:£=£= 


:*=*= 


E^EeSeSeI 


Come  !  come  !  come  !    O'er  the  hills, 

r#—  •  —  J-K-J . • — • — • 


free  from  care,        In  my  home  true  pleasure  share ;  Blossoms  sweet,  flow'rs  most  rare 


V — *-rj:n_ T-pr-l-i-- 


0—0—0--, 9-0-0 — r 

0-0—0-  J  "= 0-0-0— l 

£HhS2E£3 


i^iiiplilliil^S 


-i^- 


Come  where  joys  are  found. 


Here     the  sparkling    dews    of  morn 


~£-t=-V~- 


3EE£ 


rtfbt 


=qV 


Tree    and  shrub  with  gems     a  -  dorn, 


:*EEE*.:EE*EE£*El 


-S-J— 


EE: 


=!£ 


:dV 


3F 


ttc 


E£ 


=t 


HEi! 


Jew -els  bright, 


gai 


ly     worn,         Beau  -  ty    all    a  -  round. 


df:t*=:=::t*i=: :=|=fc=i:*=r=:  :E*_=::E*_=:iq=*=z: 


n 


Ei-=a- 


— \~T0r-m 0-r * ~-m 


Come !  come  !  come  ! 
Not  a  sigh,  not  a  tear, 
E'er  is  found  in  sadness  here, 
Music  soft,  breathing  near, 

Charms  away  each  care  ! 
Birds,  in  joyous  hours,  among 
Hill  and  dell,  with  grateful  song, 
Dearest  strains  here  prolong, 

Vocal  all  the  air ! 

Tra  la  la  la,  tra  la  la, 

Tra  la  la  la,  tra  la  la, 
Dearest  strains  here  prolong, 

V"cal  all  the  air ! 


r 


Come  !  come  !  come ! 
When  the  day's  gently  gone, 
Evening  shadows  coming  on, 
Then,  by  love,  kindly  won, 

Truest  bliss  be  thine ! 
Ne'er  was  found  a  bliss  so  pure 
Never  joys  so  long  endure ; 
Who  would  not  love  secure  ? 

Who  would  joys  decline  ? 

Tra  la  la  la,  tra  la  la, 

Tra  la  la  la,  tra  la  la, 
Who  would  not  love  secure  ? 

Who  would  joys  decline  1 


_j— — i^ 


THE    WATCHER. 


ARRANGED    II T   F.  WEllxAND 


70101 


JUITAR. 


2.  Within  that  dwelling  lonely,  Where  want  and  darkness  reign,  Her  precious  child,  her  on-Iy  Lay  moaning  in  his  pain ;     And 

gE-^f-ai— J— 1— *==m— '— "rhg-*— *— — fcz =Ej_b>=j-*  =  »~ g ~_ ~ *z  J-*—*—*  —*— 0-7— j- 1 
1.  The  night  was  dark  and  fearful, The  blast  swept  wailing  by,     A  watcher  pale  and  tearful,  Look'd  forth  with  anxious  eye,  How 


1    1  r 

a — 1 — • — 1-*- 


:fc;? 


:JEH 


3t 


p^fi 


:=t 


Is- 


_r 


r 


g 


S 


F 


death  a- lone  can  free  him,  She  feels  that  this-must  be,     But     oh!    for  morn  to  see  him  Smile  once   a-gain    on  me.      And 


dfc 


=W 


rfc8=U=t=tE 


-----x 


wist-ful-ly  she  gaz-eth,  No  gleam  of  morn  is  there,  Her     eyes  to  heav'n  she  raiseth,  In 


:t* — y     v — V- 


S=SE?E^==E?Efc  ^5EEE<E^EE=fEEEg 


P=£En=^EjEEEE] 

y'r.  How 

I 

E±E*3 


a  -  go-ny  of  pray 'r.  How 


Si 


death  alone  can  free 


him,  She   feels  that  this  must  be,       But  oh!  for  morn  to  see  him  Smile  once  agam    on  me 

All  libitum 

— m=^- 1 =fa 


=£= 


=fcs=l= 


^=^= 


r£=^=5=t^ 


wist-ful-ly   she  gaz 


C   *   s— *-*=*-  *-T-«-^-te|#— m — _ n 


eth,  No    gleam  of  morn  is  there,  Her  eyes  to  heav'n  she  raiseth,  In      a  -  go  -  ny  ofpray'r. 


A  hundred  lights  are  glancing 

In  yonder  mansion  fair, 
And  merry  feet  are  dancing; 

They  heed  not  morning  there. 
0  young  and  joyous  creatures, 

One  lamp  from  out  your  store 
Would  give  that  poor  boy's  features 

To  his  mother's  gaze  once  mor«» 


The  morning  sun  is  shining  j 

She  heedeth  not  its  ray: 
Beside  her  dead  reclining, 

The  pale  dead  mother  lay. 
A  smile  her  lips  were  wreathing, 

A  smile  of  hope  and  love, 
As  tho'  she  still  were  breatlrinp 

There's  light  for  us  above 


1'20 


Moderate* 
Guitar. 


CHARITY. 


i^im 


r* 


U* 


:Srstf 


G 


ARRANGED  BY  LEOPOLD  VKIONKK 
_4 


zizzzzjzzz1zF£*^zzz!^:=zP^tz--z^zzzzH 

Szzzzzzfzf zzz^zj^zzfEzzzg-rfaj 

f  tit  v»  —     — 


^ife^F* 


** 


3se= 


:3- 


*=s 


£ 


:£= 


^^Hfc= zpzzzzte^izprz^zzzlszrfsj 


1.  Meek  and  lo\r-ly,  pure  and  ho  -  ly,  Chief  a-mong  the  "blessed  three,"  Turning  sadness      in -to  gladness,  Heav'n  bom 

PP  —  F  F       F    F    F       "T  r    T      F1  =•  = .  =       zz    zz     — 


A  Tempo. 


^.^^z^IFFFES^gzF^^EFSFFFF^IE^zF^FgEiE^FFFFa 


-a 


art     thou,  Char-i  -  ty !  Pi  -  ty     dwelleth  in      thy  bosom,     Kindness  reigneth  o'er  thy     heart,  Gentle 

Jfe  Rail.  ^.-~*—^*'  I  _«.»1""B        I       I  — 1^*1       r  ~~  __^""""<       1^1  — »l^^    J^ 

zzz=j-±z^±z^rfgzFjr«s=z=zSfzz — 1;g%zjrf gEgJUJL- ugizrjzgzz * 


F 


*4s= 


r- 


C^#- 


zz*E^^Et= 


=*-#- 


x  / 


Rilaril. 

ZZNzzzz. 
tta — 


l=ut 


:zXz=^ 


:*zs#z±:*zzzzz 


Chief  a- 


thoughts  alone  can  sway  thee,  Judgment  hath  in  thee  no       part.  Meek  and  low-ly,  pure  and  ho  -  ly. 


*^ 


S^zz^rzjzzgaazfczgz^pr:  _z=-r^ 

-i- — . r*5f— '-2 — H2 — hi — M — ! +-• i-F* • 1- 


r 


FzzzFFfJ 


1 


#z*s 


:=f5: 


=^e 


£ 


=3*: 


t: 


ggJEg 


Rail. 


V^=S 


TS- 


^ 


mong  the  "  blessed  three," 


Turning  sadness     in  -  to  gladness,  Heav'n-born  art  thou,     Cha-ri  -  ty  ! 

1  r^     h   ^_  N    T      , 

Fzp5" 


.52- 


F^zzz?z|*rz^zzzjzzfzz3 


-• 
'0- 


m 


J 


SECOND     TERSE. 


Hoping  ever  —  failing  never  — 
Though  deceived,  believing  still ; 

Long  abiding,  all  confiding, 
To  thy  heavenly  Father's  will  ■ 


Never  weary  of  well  doing, 
Never  fearful  of  the  end  ; 

Claiming  all  mankind  as  brothers, 
Thou  dost  all  alike  befriend, 
Meek  and  lowly,  &c. 


An  dan  lino 
,  un  e  spressione. 


LOVE  NOT. 

„— u»g  =====  ii         ^^T~. 

!SR-r  <-af — I — 1-i  —I      I     -  I'H-T— I— T#-' 


121 


ARBANGED    BY  P    WV1LASU 


=       ~~ Efc  —  z=       3  =  ^f    -f        ==  =  ==     y 


B=z=^i:=fe==te====:i±==5==gb^ =grfc£5: 


few 


EE8? 


1 


short  hours. 


6 


=  =t  =:  -9-    -*-     —-  — 

T  7#~  '»'  '  '  ",»-  a  "»■ 


2  3 

Love  not !   love  not !  the  thing  you  love  may  die,  Love  not !  love  not!  the  thing  you  love  may  chango 

May  perish  from  the  gay  and  gladsome  earth,  The  rosy  lip  may  ceaee  to  smile  on  you, 

The  silent  stars,  the  blue  and  smiling  sky,  The  kindly  beaming  eye  grow  cold  and  stiange, 

Beams  on  its  grave,  as  onoe  upon  its  birth. —  Love  not !         The  heart  still  warmly  beat,  yet  not  be  true. — Love  uoi 

4 
Love  not!  love  not!  Oh  warning  vainly  said 

In  present  hours,  as  in  years  gone  by : 
Love  flings  a  hallo  round  the  dear  one's  head, 

Faultless,  immortal,  till  they  change  or  die. — Love  not' 


123 


THE    WIDOW    OF    NAIN. 


AKEARGED  BY  A    BCHMT1 


Andanla 
Affetuoso. 


( 


SlESE 


1.  Wake 


not,  oh  mo   -    ther, 

-i--| 1 — i  - 


r    i" 


r-  r- 


£e£ 


3 

ipzj: 


?ES3: 


,A .  —J 


=« 


:zN= 


« 


sounds  of    la  -  men-ta 

-* 


i=*=*: 


tion, 


weep     not    help  -  less  -  ly. 


Weep  not,     oh  wi    -    dow, 

t    '    >    ?      r-    =    ?    r 


7" 


**" 


«j> i_^ 


Strong 


^_._*zzp: 


ill 


tit* 


his  arm,  the     being  -  er      of     sal  -  va 


-£ 


EE5S 


-  tion. 


Strong 


is 


the  word  . 


of 


r     t    r     r      r      f    r      f    r'     f     T     ' 


i 


P=|=fe^EfEf^tEEgfzJz 


S£ 


^Se 


_= _£i 


|e£ 


I 


God    to   suc-cour  thee,  .  .  Strong      is      the    word  ...  of  God    to   succour  thee. 


#t* — jH — n — n-4  •  j — — — n— i — T    h — n — n-Mvffe 

*-• 0-0 •-•-•- •- 0-0 0-0 0—0 m J- 0-0 0-0 0-0-0-0—  '    00-0- 


j^$m 


SECOND     TERSE. 

Bring  forth  the  cold  corpse,  slowly  slowly  bear  him, 
Hide  his  pale  features  with  the  sable  pall ; 

Chide  not  the  sad  one  wildly  weeping  near  him, 
Wilowed  and  childless,  she  has  lost  her  all. 


THIRD     VERSE. 


Why  pause  the  mourners  ?  who  forbids  our  weeping, 
Who  the  dark  pomp  of  sorrow  has  delayed  ? 

"  Set  down  the  bier,  he  is  not  dead,  but  sleeping ; 
Young  man  arise,"  He  spake  and  was  obeyed. 


FOURTH     VERSE. 

Change  then,  oh  sad  one !  grief  to  exultation, 
Worship  and  fall  before  Messiah's  knee ; 

Strong  was  his  arm,  the  bringer  of  salvation, 
Strong  was  the  word  of  God  to  succour  thee. 


123 


LILLY    DALE. 


ABBANGED  BY  J    DE  AIMJDERA 


ANDANTE 
8IMPLICE. 


^.NTE   \ 


zfe* 


*Efe 


-*-J- 


:53 


m 


2.  Her 


I 


m 


3  I 

-#-  3-m- 


^zzzEEzz^l 


^r 


3" 


±rz± 


1.  'Twas  a 


"£- 


3=«-: 


cheeks     that  once  glowed,     with  the 


rose     tint  of  health,  By  the 


hand     of  disease    had  turn'd    pale, 


ttzfcrar 


still'      night,        And  the 


moon's  pale         light,  Shone  soft     o'er        hill     and  vale ; 


death      damp  was   on 


wm 


Sr^ 


The 


pure     white     brow, 


S^ 


'--e1=£-=^ 


--X 


Of    mj 


poor     lost        Lil  -    ly 


Dale. 


mm 


3tg_Z 


friends       mute  with  grief,   Stood    a     -     round  the  death      bed 


r± 


M- 


zjzz^zzzizzzjz:ziz_-i 


zzizzfc 


i3=t=t 


Of   my 

■1 


poor    lost       Lil    -   ly 


Dale. 


And  the 


f  ■  ■    - 

)        *     I — I — I — I     I — I — I — i  I   i    I   I    j   i    i    i  i_j   i  j    j     j  j 


3=a£ 


j 

z« 

iSzzzTzzzzS 


Jzz: 


"H~^ 


_^ •!-_* ?- 


--zizzztzzizzzr 


CHORUS. 


=te±= 


I 


:z*i 


-©--- 


N^ 


Oh! 


fczzztirirlzzdzSz^zSzz- 


sweet 


Lilly, 


dear 


Lil 


~^"- 


■*-.*  -*: 


Dale, 

nr 


Now  the 


zt » x— • B: 


i 


*r*- 


^rr^ 


wild 


-S«zz^- 


zzcz-fv    1  IzzzzXzz^zizz-zrzzNzz^^r 

^*E*EE*EEizz1zzf=3EE*E?zzfeE 


rose         blossoms,  O'er  her 


pspiiip 


lit  -  tie  green    grave,  Neath  the 


trees     in     the  flow'   •    ry 


vale. 


I> 


~4-         I     -•-    — - 

•-      ""or     -m- 


"I  go,"  she  said, 

"To  the  land  of  rest," 

And  ere  my  strength  shall  fail 

I  must  tell  you  where, 

Near  my  )wn  loved  home, 

You  must  lay  poor  Lilly  Bale. 


'Neath  the  chestnut  tree ; 

Where  the  wild  flowers  grow, 

And  the  stream  ripples  forth  thro'  the  vale. 

Where  the  birds  shall  warble 

Their  songs  in  spring, 

There  lay  poor  Lilly  Dale. 


WITH  FADED  FLOWERS  THY  LYRE  WE'LL  WREATHE. 


Voice. 


Guitar. 


,,     Modern  to  Amsni. 


AERAJIGED  BY  A.   SCHM.TZ. 


S5=S 


1.  With    fa  -  -  ded  flow'rs    thy      lyre 

i    i    i 


Slp=§g3§3 


:t= 


*=*± 


t=t=t3=t= 


C5--1 

m 


we'll  wreathe,  The     flow'rs     that  glad  -  den'd 


f:=zzGzR3zd=dzp-*:^ 


; 


I 


zqz^szzzfczzzzps: 


thee ; 


:==5zqEI:q— z£B=^f=p: 


=1- 


=*t 


And     ev'  -   ry      droop    -    ing        bud        will  breathe     A 


t=t: 


j   1   1   1   1   1    1   1   1   1   1   1       1   1   1   1   1   1    1   1   1    1    1    1       1   1   1   1   1    1    1    1    1    1   1   1 


pur  -  furn'd     mem 


:zt 


d_H-      Jzztzjzzizfczt 
,  ^z?z^zzlzzi=*zzzz:zz= 

zlz* *-* 


1 


:Erzz3zzSz±z£zzzzjfc 


g=feE=Z^p 


ry- 


No 


#- 


ther     touch   will 


wake     that    string 

T^ 


From  which    such 


Mu 


sic 


•zz^zz&jlzzfr^zlztizzzd Ejfcnd^E*=  =4^|±=^iH?3z±-i±^=dbf==^t=^&:zzSiE : 
-— f- j~^ ^ J~-- .__ r.^ ^ 1 


£ 


:ft*z 


z#P= 


:B 


came, 


Un  -  less        it 


be 


the 


-1 — 0. 


mm 


=ts 


it*: 


*t= 


SztSEzr 


=3- 


^f 


thy 


night  -  wind's  wing      To     syl     -     -     -  la-ble 


3=t 


name, 


zzfzzz^zf: 
No 


I 


3 


zrzjzz: 


> 

:zt: 


zz^EE 


;! 


33. 


ztJzfzz^zzizz-z 
*zzzzzzzzzz3zzzz 


ther    touch    will 

fT 


iqidifczlztSJSzrzziH: 
=zzz=zzz;z1zzzz;zz-z^EfEqzi: 


wake    that      string     From       which 

dzztZiZZZt 


such  Mu 


1     1  0    1  1     1     <     1     1     1  111 

zjzz^zMzpdzdzz^zz^zzzlzdzzjztzJzzCi 
izf—^riz:  :zz)z«z?zzz5z*zz:dzszf  zzzfziz: : 


( 


3 


— =i_ 


=t 


— »_ 
From  which  such  mu  -  sic 


=t 


zizzzNlzzzzzz^zzzzI^zs^zszli: 
•^-  *-4  -j T — > — -F1- 


From  which  such  music  came. 


!  n  1  i  1     ij  r         iiii     1  1  1  1  1  1   1  1  1  1  1  1  1  1  'i  1  1  1    t-        t~       11,111  i.iiii     I 
^-z^zzi^z^-^fzfj:^^ 
?~3 3 3 3 5" 3 %~ ' — 3 — ^I-^-1 


f 


SECOND      VERSE. 


The  sculptur'd  uvn  that  decks  the  grav3, 
Where  sleeps  the  mighty  one  ; 

The  Lrazeii  records  of  the  brave 
Time  breathes  on,  and  they're  gone. 


Thy  grave  will  be  a  holy  spot, 
Where  years  have  passed  away ; 

Thou  art  not  one  to  be  forgot: 
Thou  art  not  for  decay  ; 


U/opderfully  Successful   (T\usie   Bool^s 


THE 


"Classic"  "Cboice"  su?d  "Popular"  Series 

/Ml  printed  by   tt>e    transfer  process  from  eijcjraved   plates  ai)d   bouijd   ii?   tl?e    best  possible   /i\ai)l)?r. 


"Song  Classics  No.  I" 

47  Classical    Songs. 

Heavy    Paper,   jSi.oo.      Boards,   $1.25. 
Cloth   Gilt,   #2.00. 


"Songs  Classics  No.  2" 

39  Classical  Songs. 

Heavy    Paper,   {Si.oo.       Boards,   $1.25. 
Cloth  Gilt,  $2.00. 


"Piano  Classics  No.  I " 

44  First  Class  Pieces. 
Heavy    Paper,    #I.oo.       Boards,    $1.25. 
Cloth   Gilt,   $2.00. 


"Classical  Pianist" 

42    Choice  Classics. 

Heavy    Paper,    gl.oo.      Boards,    #1.25. 
Cloth  Gilt,  $2.00. 


"Piano  Classics  No.  2  " 

31   Choice    Classics. 

Heavy    Paper,    £1.00.      Boards,    $1.25. 
Cloth  Gilt,  $2.00. 


"Young  People's  Classics  No.  I " 

51  Pieces. 

Heavy    Paper,    $1.00.      Boards,    $1.25. 
Cloth    Cilt,    $2.00. 


^iPf?^ 


"Young  People's  Classics  No.  2 " 

A  fitting  companion  for  No.  I.  48  com- 
positions. Heavy  Paper,  §1.00.  Boards, 
$1.25.     Cloth  Gilt,  §2.00. 


"Classic  Tenor  Songs" 

36  Classical  Songs  for  Tenor  Voice. 
Heavy    Paper,    $1 .00.      Boards,    $1.25. 
Cloth    Gilt,    $2.00. 


"Song  Classics  For  Low  Voice " 

40  Classical    Songs. 

Heavy    Paper,    gl.oo.      Boards,    $1.25. 
Cloth  Gilt,  #2.00. 


"Classic  Baritone  and  Bass  Songs" 

33  Classical  Songs  for  Deep  Voice. 
Heavy    Paper,    $1.00.      Boards,    $1.25, 
Cloth  Gilt,  $2.00. 


"Choice  Sacred  Solos  lor  Low  Voice" 

An  exceeding  Choice  Collection  of  40  Sacred 
Songs  for  Contralto,  Baritone  and  Bass.  Heavy 
Paper,  $1.00.    Boards,  $1. 25.   Cloth  Gilt,  £2.00 


"Choice  Sacred  Solos" 

39  Songs  for  Soprano,  Mezzo-Soprano, 
and  Tenor.  Heavy  Paper,  #1.00.  Boards, 
$1.25.     Cloth  Gilt,  ,$2.00. 


"Choice  Sacred  Duets" 

A  Collection  of  30  Duets  by  Standard 
Authors.  Heavy  Paper,  $1.00.  Boards,  £1.25 
Cloth  Gilt,  £2.00. 


"Classic  Four  Hand  Collection" 

19  Elegant  Pianoforte  Duets. 
Iieavy    Paper,    $1.00.      Boards.   $1.25. 
Cloth  Gilt.  #2.00. 


"Classical  Collection  for  Violin  and  Piano* 

Each  Part  in  a  Separate  Book. 
Complete  $1.00. ,  Violin  Part,  50  cents. 
Piano,  75.     Note.   Vol.  2  in  Press  same  price. 


"Choice  Vocal  Duets" 

26  Choice  Duets. 

Pleavy    Paper,    $1.00.       Boards,  $1.25. 
Cloth    Gilt,    $2.00. 


"Choice  and  Popular  Alto  Songs" 

33  Carefully  Edited  Songs  for  Low  Voice. 
Heavy    Paper,    $1.00.      Boards,   $1.25. 
Cloth  Gilt,  JS2.00. 


"Popular  Song  Collection" 

A  Charming  Collection  of  36  Refined 
Popular  Songs.  Heavy  Paper,  £1.00.  Boards, 
$1.25.     Cloth  Gilt,  $2.00.  (- 


"Popular  Dance  Collection  No,  I " 

27  Pieces  of  Popular  Dance  Music. 
Heavy    Paper,    $1.00.      Boards,    Si. 25. 
Cloth  Gilt,  $2.00 


Popular  Dance  Collection  No.  2 " 

25    Popular    Dances 
Iieavy    Paper,    #1.00.     Boards,     $1.25. 
Cloth  Gilt,  £2.00. 


Boston  :  Omve$  Drrsor*  Gojvipr^y 


Xieva  Yot*k: 

C.   H-    DITSOri   &   CO., 
867  Beoadtxiay. 


Chicago: 
Cot*.  State  &.  nionroc  Sts 


Boston: 

JOHN   C.    H^Y^ES   &  CO., 

33  CouPt<St453  WashingtonSts. 


Philadelphia: 
J.   E.  DITSOJM  &  CO. 
1228  Chestnut  St. 


ppderfully  Sueeessful   [T\usie   Boo^s 


th: 


u 


Classic"  "Cboice"  <M?d  "Pcpular"  Series 


|riijted  by  tl?e   transfer  process  from  enciraued   plates  ar?d   bound   ir>   tl?e   best  possible    mapi^r. 


"Popular  Piano  Collection  No.  I " 

A  most  pleasing  collection  of  Popular  and 
Effective  Salon  Music.  27  Pieces.  Heavy 
Paper,  $1.00.   Boards,  $1.25.   Cloth  Gilt,  $2.00 


"Popular  Four  Hand  Collection" 

20  Pieces.      12S  Pages. 
Heavy    Paper,    $1.00.      Boards,    $1.25. 
Cloth    Gilt,    J2.00. 


"Popular  Piano  Collection  No,  2*" 

24  Pieces.  The  very  latest  Popular  Piano 
Music.  Heavy  Paper,  gl. 00.  Boards.Sl.25. 
Cloth  Gilt,  £2.00. 


"Popular  Collection  for  Violin  and  Piano" 

Each  Part  in  a  Separate  Book. 

OvcrThirty  Standard  and  Popular  Compo- 
sitions. Complete  (paper)  Si  .00.  Violin  Part 
(paper)  50  cents.     Piano  (paper)  75  cents. 


"Popular  Collection  for  Flute  and  Piano" 

Each   Part  in  a  Separate  Book. 
Complete,  $1.00.     Flute    Part,  50  cents. 
Piano,  75  cents. 


wwww 

*m* 
m 


"Young  Players  Popular  Collection" 

51  Pieces. 

Heavy    Paper,    $I.oo.      Boards.    $1.25. 
Cloth  Gilt,  S2.00. 


"Popular  Collection  for  Clarinet  and  Piano" 

Each  Part  in  a  Separate  Book. 
Complete,  $1.00.    Clarinet  Part,  50  cents. 
Piano,  75,  cents. 


"Popular  Collection  for  Cornet  and  Piano" 

Each  Part  in  a  Separate  Book. 
Complete    (paper)    Sl.oo.     Cornet   Part 
(paper)  50  cents.     Piano  Part  (paper)  75  cts. 


MISCELLANEOUS 


"Sabbath  Day  Music" 

For  Piano.  39  Pieces.  Beautiful  Music. 
Heavy  Paper,  $1.00.  Boards,  $1.25.  Cloth 
Gilt,  #2.00. 


"Operatic  Piano  Collection" 

Gems  from  18  Operas  arranged  for  the 
Piano.  Heavy  Paper,  $1.00.  Boards,  Si. 25. 
Cloth  Gilt,  S2.00. 


"Good  Old  Songs" 


Compiled  by  J.  C.  H.  Over  100  genuine 
"Good  Old  Songs."  pleavy  Paper,  $'-°a 
Boards,  $1.25.     Cloth  Gilt,  $2.00. 


"Minstrel  Songs  Old  and  New  " 

102  Songs.  215  Pages,  Sheet  Music 
Size.  Heavy  Paper,  £1.00.  Boards.  S1.25. 
Cloth  Gilt,  S2.00. 


"Songs  of  Ireland " 

63  Gems  of  Ireland's  Famous  Song 
Writers.  Heavy  Paper,  Si.oo.  Boards,Si.2S. 
Cloth  Gilt,  S2.00. 


"Comic  and  Minstrel  Songs" 

46  of  the  Most  Popular  Songs  of  the  Day. 
Heavy    Paper,    $1.00.      Boards,    £1-25. 
Cloth  Gilt,  S2.00. 


"College  Songs  for  the  Guitar " 

71  Choice  Selections  of  the  Most  Pop- 
ular College  Songs.  Paper,  Si.oo.  Cloth, 
ll.SO. 


"College  Songs  for  Banjo" 

Over  So  Choicest  College  Songs  with 
Banjo  Accompaniment.  Paper,  $i.oo.  Cloth, 
Si-5°- 


Wmm 


mm 


"College  Songs  for  Girls " 

Handsome  Title  in  Three    Colors.     120 
Pages. 

Heavy  Paper,  Si.oo. 


"Mandolin  and  Piano  Duets" 

Arranged  by  Sep.  Winner.     42  Pieces. 

Complete,  $1.00.  The  Mandolin  Part 
will  also  be  Published  in  a  Separate  Book. 
Price,  50  cents. 


"Banner  Folio" 

For  Violin  and  Piano.  Arranged  by  Sep. 
Winner.  42  Pieces.  Complete,  $1. 00.  The 
Violin  is  also  Published  and  sold  separately 
for  50  cents. 


and  Tunes" 

12S  Pages.      105   Songs. 

Boards,    $1 .00.     Full    Gilt,    $2.00. 


mm 

mm 
mm 
mm 
mm 


"Fairy  Fingers" 

New  Edition,  Revised  and  Enlarged. 
36   Pieces.     Sheet  Music  Size.     Boards, 
Si.oo.    Cloth  Gilt,  S2.00. 


JIOTICE.-We  have  prepared,  and  colli  send  by  mall  f  Bee  to  any  addBess,  a  pamphlet  giving  a  description,  list  of  contents 
etc,  ete.,  of  all  nem  musle-books,  eolleetions  of  musie,  ete.,  published  by  the  QUIVER  DITSOfl  COmPHflV,  Boston,  Mass. 


BOSTON:    OlilVE^    DiTSOH    CO|VlPflHV 


I  Vonfc : 
|lTS01M  &  CO., 
ipoadcuay. 


Chieago : 

IiYOfl    fit    fiEHIlV, 

Cop.  State  &  monpoe  Sts 


Boston: 

tlOflfl  C.   flHYflES  &  CO., 

S3  Court  &-9S3  WashingtonSts. 


Philadelphia; 
tf.  H.  DITSOfl  &  CO. 
1228  Chestnut  St. 


lis  far  iiiji  #  looks  far  §i 
:--  loate  far  Jllairkiiu.  MS 


; 
I 


^fs^ 


-.& 


collf re  -ongs  for  the  itanjo. 


I-Tic      . 

A    fiT 
ijn.'-'at&i   "i  .  ■:, 

"ntl   I  ix'Ofr   ;  - 


*!  GO;    Clot    ,  3M.5C. 

e.o> -  of   l'1      f'H'.i     is  ai    i   id  ,'S    9 
..I'icute"'   So)ig.         ■>l-4l)ii!ig  ttlP 

-  iilli/Wll  L'Oijk  (lit'''.     .1  "  !  'ull'  gfe 

v-th  i*»sy  banjo   ^CeorarwiitTnetiiS, 
f'i,i!  lie    po'lJU1  ■      ai'../.  g  <ho3i' 


Or  -tis.i'  Acm.3  Baujo  )  '^Lhcx        P    v    I    Tl.  Curtis       '    ice, 

si.-;. 

\    new-   hook   by  t'  «i  7    "ill-kiio    ,1  .  utb,      .      nose  fiuitur  e,  1  ., 
I'    muc    si;   {-'''I'lf-iT.'  : ),  iin.1    :»ip   in  wliieti  nil  hanjoists  \s-ill        !     ih- 

l        i1         I-     ru'tf^uttQ    ihe    icdiio.  jtti    Of    npisie      :.nd   ;-.   Very    n,-il    Pwl , 

.iz,  d  1'e.i  m  '.  of  digrams,  showing  '.-eery  key,  chord,  :-  el  icr.lc.  on  the 
'...I'm.  \,»n  n  tint'  'nlK'L-linu  of  |>ivl-'  -ive  instnmi -'.eel  tmd  vu'-a! 
j:.   i'     ,  f  >1  •  '.  i    .nd  arranged  expressi-.    l.jr  Uii.  work. 

■  >.stri' mental   Ranioist.     Trie...  °:i.00. 

,4.ioth-i    (■!<■  }■',>   and   v  olt-^i  !r  eti   I    ■dm-  '  eion  oJ      in    :wjrie^ja:   Pt>me 
it  t.'  "  bairns  (''"pi-),  thr.  -   ',>anj:)S  (txioi*',  ton/i  "hd  /.'..  /*«.  jT.    ,  ami 


I    CaO  ^hinsorVs  i<ari,,  instructor.    VtU   . 

1  A    "'  *    '     ■'■    '■"    t>oi-..    for    I.e.   -.■  -ilar  inrtrmiiWitj 

os'  <<•  ','      ,   .<*„r.    „  hw  <:;>'.      •   ■  .  f  i-Ci.i;  ami  insfunej 
|     '''W,         ■  l'      ill  '"'    '">un<1  giyyn  /.oni  to.   w,  ...... 

!     'Vlnr'rt,  Easy  Sj-tvm  for  the  Banjo.    £ 

,  Pi/  i-     -  'l'>nce«.  etc 

Winners  laeal  Method  for  Banjo,    iO-csitfe, 

Sim     .   i'l.-'lrc  lions  am]  nni.-i... 

I    Winner's  New  School  for  fcanlo.    50  cents, 

Re  liments  of  Music  and  Po]  jlar  My.nul.is;  '■ 
j    Cuitar  at  Hv»nie.    P'    e,  JuiuJa,  sa.i nj  ,^hitli,  9B.5C 

A  npM-  ciyii  ■ction  i  r  tlK  dlidicont  jtid  inmt  timm lw 
.    inmt.il  luiHn ■  ot  tii.   day.-   .Ml  *'.    sontfn  have  uicvl .--an* 
.iii  K-rits  for  :1k*  y.ciar. 

V     o.'il    Guirar.     i'ricc.  V-  ..r,  fSl.fm. 

.A     111  IV    ;   ...|        an"'      (    .lie    Hon    r*    plrCCS,      -1  ■  .-U'll    v 

!     pleasin/    ..timvl  i.-istos  'nd  r-qnir.   r    its. 

Converse's    Meth  ><1   for  OuStar.  f^H 


I  nco, 


1.00. 


;.niii   ni-'eiy  B"rwr.^vd  for  this  pojrlnr  inftn. 

-.■    M'i.|:.i    Heei  l'oll-.i""'    i   -■     i;   1:  voi;  •. 
■  r.nji.I(.  "  ":  T.i  I'aU'ma."  ■■  Medlr- front  ^1'(ielo     •  ■''    -  '  . 

•■  U.    \i.iei  ( 'ji'n."  •'  Wouiair«  J/oi ,    W.alUi       '  fl  "1  Miiioy  more 

i^otisiin's    ^  Tipufted    Methc.    fo-    •"  ne    Baisi 
,vi  Cetitt. 

'rh'-  b«vl<  :-  »o  urrn "veil  t'-  'I  the  ntu.leiit  fli  'U  ami) 

-n.(/i       .  .■  -,-,  ,    il^..  ('-:  u'.'--    '  l.arijo  *  (.-,.  Se^'i'iirinr  '        i 

.■  mi  t    I   j./:  :*•«  Mel!  filled  with  oxei 

i  ..cii. 

V'ooai  Ra.njui8t.     l^c     md  Sdperh  Book  for  }iV.  p.    '.,■ 

'    ■    -p ,-.lnr  '    faioi\v    POllgS,  Willi  i        i.i  p 

i  '    i  >!;■  .  ;ii.n  ; 

;>o'        '  '  ■    ■     -  vorsal   ?inji>  Iiir.ti  uctor.     By   '' 

ai.ii'i. 


...-  the 
te''lev," 


..il  lie  - 


OlAS. 

This  systematic  ami  t,ho..iu(fh  mc',.i.|  eon 
flirvMloiig,  a"i  fifty  pite.  i.  >ucal  ami  inslrnr.ental 

Curtisc:'  Method  for  the  Cuitar.     By  M.  P.  i 

Pyici ,  -.(.on. 

\    vroR  ;■  :       .,.,1    -onipk-te   "  Method "  for  the   Sp.) 
■,••■;     <  rlie  ..icf'-nlary  principles  of  n,iif;e        \    standard  J 

..I     . 

v   -I'e-'ac    rar  Without  a  Master,     n., 

I'.i-'.v  niel'-o     of  Isamiuji    ,'uit«r. 

Winners  Guitar  Primer,     £0  certs. 

lllnlino  'ltd  of   1'oj'iilar  umsic 

Wirnor'b  Nev    School  for  the  Guita: 

so    plf  ;m  I  roerioio  ::ni!  plcnflirig  m'tttiie. 

W  i   ler's  ideal  Method  for  the  Guitar.    10 

. '...'iv.'  ,  ,i  popular, 

W    .n.^r"     Pr  -feet  Guide  for  the  Guitar.    .0] 
Winer's  Easy  Systen^  for  GuiUir.     50  om- 
Th.':    iiAanr'  >'  n.    '»'   Si.r.  w-vsm.    ;.-,  cots 
■  rii/lo.  !  '<>■■    (■!;■,     ., i nl  pouulur  .-nra. 


*.$?.?!  for  (nmyhk  JXS(r;p;l;<'  ('dl^lo-jiip  of  ^ksic  Books.  * 


BOSTOIv  : 

OUvEK   DITSON  COM  PAN  * 


f,  IT  It     III.)  ■ 

:  '.       ,iil        IV, 


>•>:'!.  in-  i  iiii  i  , 

,-   - 


hoirovt